BTicino SpA

Viale Borri, 231

21100 Varese - Italy
www.bticino.com

BTicino SpA reserves at any time the right to modify the contents of this booklet and to communicate,
in any form and modality, the changes brought to the same.
2-WIRES
DOOR ENTRY
SYSTEM

DESIGN AND
INSTALLATION
TECHNICAL GUIDE
AD-EXCM22DFG/GB - Edition 04/2022

PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS FOR ELECTRICAL

AND DIGITAL BUILDING INFRASTRUCTURE
2 WIRES AUDIO & VIDEO
DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

TECHNICAL GUIDE Section 1

GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION Section 2

WIRING DIAGRAMS / VARIANTS Section 3

INSPECTION AND PUTTING INTO OPERATION Section 4

CATALOGUE Section 5

GUIDE FOR DESIGN AND INSTALLATION

4
CONTENTS
1. TECHNICAL GUIDE
2 WIRES system, the simplest solution for each installation . . . . . 1.1
Ideal for refurbishments and the renewal of the old door entry system. . 1.2
The main devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3
The accessory devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4
The system functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5

2. GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION

System layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1
SELV double insulation safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2
Installation of entrance panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3
Installation of internal units and DIN devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4
The cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5
Physical configuration - general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6
Configuration of entrance panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7
Audio systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8
System performance - audio systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9
Video systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10
Possible video systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11
System performance - single family video systems . . . . . . . . . .2.12
System performance - multi family video systems. . . . . . . . . . .2.13
System expansion with interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.14
Configuration of 346850 interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.15
Configuration of 346851 interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.16
Configuration of 346891 interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.17
Classe 300EOS / Classe 100X
connected video internal unit wiring rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.18

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM SUMMARY 5

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 3. WIRING DIAGRAMS
Example 1 - the villa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1
Example 2 - the two-family villa. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2
Example 3 - The apartment building. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3
Example 4 - The apartment block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4
Example 5 - The apartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5
Example 6 - The small house block. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6
1 or more main audio EP and secondary EP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7
1 or more audio Entrance Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8
One-family system with 1 or more audio Entrance Panels
and 5 intercommunicating Internal Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9
Two-family system, 1 EP and 3 IU for each apartment
with “Internal intercom and intercom among apartments” function. . 3.10
1 or more main audio Entrance Panels
with universal speaker unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11
Multifamily system with 1 or more main EP,
5 intercommunicating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.12
Multifamily system with several main audio EP and call
to the guard station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13
Video system with 1 EP and star-connected riser using
non-twisted cables or pre-existing cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14
Multifamily video system with universal speaker module 346991
and associated separate camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.15
1 main video Entrance Panel
and 1 riser with floor shunt wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16
1 main video Entrance Panel and 2 risers
with floor shunt wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.17
2 main video Entrance Panels and 1 riser
with in-out wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.18
2 main video EP with additional power supply
and star-connected riser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.19
One-family system with 1 video Entrance Panel
and 5 Internal Units in parallel and intercommunicating . . . . . .3.20
Two-family system, 1 EP and 3 IU for each apartment with
“Internal intercom and intercom among apartments” function. . . 3.21
Intercom in apartment without interface 346850. . . . . . . . . . .3.22
Multifamily system with 1 main video EP,
2 risers and max. 5 intercom among apartments. . . . . . . . . . 3.23
Multifamily system with 2 EP (1 with separate camera, 2 additional
cameras and riser with apartment interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.24
System in apartment with 2 WIRES analog interface
349410. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.25
System in apartment with apartment interface . . . . . . . . . . . 3.26
System line expansion with interface 346851. . . . . . . . . . . . .3.27
Multifamily system with 39 risers with independent audio . . . . . 3.28
One-family system with max 16 cameras
or Entrance Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.29

6
 System with 346851 module for Entrance Panel line doubling;
max. 39 independent risers and apartment interfaces . . . . . . . 3.30
System with max 39 independent risers and riser extension
(100 video IU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.31
Internal Units expansion in apartment
- (Example up to 10 IU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.32
System with 1 guard station and independent risers . . . . . . . . 3.33
System with several guard stations and independent risers . . . . 3.34
Hierarchical system with 1 backbone GS and 1 GS for each
independent riser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.35
Hierarchical system with backbone GS, riser GS and Slave GS
on the backbone and on the riser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.36
2 wire/IP mixed system with guard station software. . . . . . . . .3.37
Residential complex with 2 wire/IP mixed system. . . . . . . . . .3.38

3.1 WIRING DIAGRAMS VARIANTS

SFERA entrance panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.1
Wiring diagrams variants of Entrance Panels/Cameras. . . . . . 3.1.2
Internal Unit Variants - Single family or multifamily systems
with apartment interface 346850. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.3
Internal Units Variants - Multifamily systems without apartment
interface 346850. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.4
Internal Units Variants - Multifamily systems without apartment
interface 346850. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1.5
Wiring diagrams variants for DIN rail devices. . . . . . . . . . . 3.1. 6
Auxiliary services – Floor call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1. 7
Auxiliary services – Door lock control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1. 8
Auxiliary services – Staircase light control. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1. 9

4. INSPECTION AND PUTTING INTO OPERATION

Inspection and putting into operation of a 2 WIRES system. . . . . 4.1
Diagnostic - Troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2

5. CATALOGUE
Pushbutton panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1
Internal units and Smart Security devices NETATMO. . . . . . . . . 5.2
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3
Audio and video kits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5
Technical sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM SUMMARY 7

WWW.BTICINO.COM
1 TECHNICAL GUIDE
 SOFTWARE AND SERVICES

PRE-SALE SERVICE

BTICINO supports the creation of 2 WIRES audio & video door entry system with a dedicated estimate software.

YouDiagram is the BTicino software for the design of Door Entry Systems.

It allows to draw the single-line diagram of the system in PDF and DXF format, the configuration, choice and
finishing of the devices, the verification of the absorptions and the installation rules on each system BUS.

Also provides the list items and the technical documentation of the devices in the project.

Free to download from www.bticino.com International website.

For further TECHNICAL INFORMATION

see the 2-Wires Door Entry System technical guide

4
AFTER SALE SERVICE

For after sales TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE, please refer to the www.bticino.com and www.legrand.com - WORLD
PRESENCE Web Sites in order to find your nearest subsidiaries :

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

2 WIRES system, the simplest solution

for each installation

YOUR WORK IS EASIER

The 2 WIRES system is easy to use. easy and fault-proof.
Thanks to the NON-POLARISED 2 There will be no more mistakes
WIRES wiring of each part of the and time lost due to subsequent
system, connection is simple, interventions.

HIGH PERFORMANCE
The 2 WIRES technology makes THE APARTMENT BLOCK SYSTEM CAN HAVE:
it possible to install all types
of systems, from villa to the 3900 Apartments 3900 Apartment video
entrance panels
apartment complex systems, with
the same ease. Moreover, the Risers with
possibility of using the existing 3 Internal Units
for apartment 39 independent
audio
cables make it an ideal solution in
refurbishments.
96 Common video
Entrance Panels 16 Guard stations

The furthest internal unit

Entrance Panel

Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

600 metres

The villa The apartment The apartment block The small house block

1.1-1
MAXIMUM VERSATILITY
The 2 WIRES system is designed of the video function, and is ideal functions to the forwarding of calls
to guarantee high versatility and in mixed audio/video systems, to to a smartphone.
adaptation to the needs of every meet the needs of the individual
customer. residents. It also offers a wide
The 2 WIRES technology allows range of entrance panels and
you to have a door entry system internal units to fit the individual
ready for the subsequent addition users: from basic door entry

network, with the IP technology

INTEGRATION WITH IP
it is possible to obtain high
TECHNOLOGY Software
system performance levels:
IP guard station
The 2 WIRES and IP technologies long distances, multichannel
may be integrated for the functions, software guard
installation of large systems. station, reception and central
Thanks to the dedicated LAN management of alarms.

THE SYSTEM CAN HAVE:

Video
1000 Entrance
Panels
10000 Video Internal
Units
IP/2 WIRES
interface
Distance from
the Entrance
100 IP devices 10 Km Panel to the
last Internal
Unit

5 Simultaneous calls on the IP backbone

CAUTION: Classe 300EOS and HOMETOUCH, CANNOT be used in

systems with IP/2 Wires interface.
2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 1.1-2
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

Ideal for refurbishments and the renewal

of the old door entry system.
The 2 WIRES system offers many advantages for the refurbishment of existing systems: reduced intervention times,
ease of execution and consequential cost reduction.
The customer will be able to enjoy aesthetically advanced devices and a wide range of new functions.

REUSE OF EXISTING CABLES

Removal of the existing entrance panel Use of an existing pair of wires to

connect the new entrance panel

No need to remove the existing cables and lay the new ones

REUSE OF FLUSH-MOUNTED BOXES

Or

Example: Tersystem or SFERA Classic SFERA NEW SFERA Robur Linea 3000
2-module flush mounted box

No masonry works required to replace the existing flush mounted box

1.2-1
SWITCHING TO VIDEO IS EASY AND IMMEDIATE

Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

Easy shift from the old analogue audio system to the new 2 WIRES colour video system

BETTER APPEARANCE AND FUNCTIONS

Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

In addition to the modern look of the device, the system also offers some additional functions:
• Intercom
• staircase light control
• release of the additional door lock
• call repetition on smartphone
• additional activations
• Alexa voice control
• Netatmo safety devices management
2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 1.2-2
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

The main devices

ENTRANCE PANEL
Audio or video outdoor pushbutton panel with colour camera. Possibility of calling audio/video internal units and activate
an associated lock. The call can be sent using the keys, by selecting the name on the display, or by entering a code on the
keypad. The lock can also be operated using a proximity reader (RFID) or by entering a numerical code on the keypad
(only available with preset pushbutton panels).
Available in different styles, finishes, and installation types (wall mounted, flush mounted, with anti-tampering protection
and with rainshield).

SFERA NEW SFERA ROBUR

Video with 1
module

Video with 2 Video with 2

pushbutton call pushbutton call
modules modules

Video with 3 digital Video with 3 digital call modules,

call modules and numerical keypad and nameplate
door lock release modules
reader

LINEA 3000

Audio Video

LINEA 2000 LINEA 300

Audio Video Anti-tamper

video

1.3-1
INTERNAL UNIT (AUDIO AND VIDEO INTERNAL UNITS)
Colour video and audio internal units for the reception of calls from the external pushbutton panel and activation of the
corresponding lock. Available in different styles and installation types (wall mounted, table top).
Using specific keys or the menu (preset video internal units only), they give the possibility of managing the video door
entry functions (e.g. activation of any cameras, locks, intercom calls, etc.).
Handsfree communication or with handset.

CLASSE 300EOS AND CLASSE 100X CONNECTED VIDEO INTERNAL UNITS

Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

Handsfree video internal units with integrated Wi-Fi connectivity

Classe 300EOS with Netatmo and Classe 100X are video internal units that give the possibility of forwarding the video door
entry call to a mobile device. The integrated Wi-Fi connectivity allows connection with your smartphone. Thanks to the
dedicated App, both while in your home and when away your will be able to manage video door entry calls, video door entry
answering machine functions (Classe 300EOS), the activation of door locks and cameras, the timed activation of lights / garden
watering systems and the Netatmo safety devices management (Classe 300EOS) using the smartphone.
Home + Security is the free APP for Android and iOS smartphones which can be downloaded from the respective digital stores.
Configuring the App needs just a few steps and, thanks to the BTicino Cloud, the connection is totally automated and managed
with the maximum level of security.

CLASSE 100 CLASSE 100

Video internal units Handsfree audio Internal unit with

internal unit handset

SPRINT L2

Internal unit with

handset

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 1.3-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

The main devices

POWER SUPPLIES
They generate the system 2 WIRES BUS and power the devices of the system. The power supplies are SELV double
insulation safety devices. Three types of power supplies are available:

Ð 346040 Power supply for 2 wires audio systems in 6 DIN modular enclosure. Power supply PRI 110 – 240 Va.c.@50 – 60
Hz. It supplies a maximum output current of 600 mA.
Ð 346050 Power supply for 2 wires audio and video systems (with integrated video adapter) in 6 DIN modular enclosure.
Power supply PRI 110 – 240 Va.c.@50 – 60 Hz. It supplies a maximum output current of 1.2 A distributed on the three
outputs (IU BUS), (TK BUS) and (SCS).
Ð 346030 Compact power supply for 2 wires audio and video systems (with integrated video adapter) in 2 DIN modular
enclosure. Suitable for small audio or video one-family systems.
Power supply PRI 230 Va.c.@50 – 60 Hz. It supplies a maximum output current of 600 mA.
Ð 346020 Additional power supply in 2 DIN modular enclosure. It gives the possibility of locally powering entrance panels
and internal units fitted with connection clamps (1 - 2). Power supply PRI 220 – 240 Va.c. It supplies a maximum output
current of 600 mA.

Audio power supply Audio and video power supply Audio and video Additional power
346040 346050 compact power supply 346020
supply
346030

AUDIO VIDEO NODE

It gives the possibility of mixing audio / video signals for the
connection to the system of external pushbutton panels and/
or 2 WIRES cameras. It gives the possibility of connecting up
to four 2 WIRES external pushbutton panels / cameras and
the generation of four 2 WIRES risers.
It must be used in conjunction with the system power supply,
item 346050. Device in 6 DIN modular enclosure.
In order to avoid jeopardising the possibility of future system
expansions, the use of the audio video node is recommended
Audio video node
with this system setup. F441

FLOOR SHUNT
Can make 2 WIRES video door entry systems with star wiring
distribution. It automatically adapts the video signal. Its small
size means it can also be placed inside the flush-mounted
box. Device in Basic enclosure with 4 outputs.

Floor shunt
346841

1.3-3
ACTUATORS
They give the possibility of controlling / activating additional electric locks, or activating generic loads (e.g. staircase
lights, lamp for the illumination of the field of vision of the camera, call forwarding to external devices, etc.) directly from
preset video internal units.
Three types of actuators are available:

Ð 346210 Relay actuator for generic loads in 2 DIN modular enclosure.

Ð 346230 Relay actuator for door lock in 2 DIN modular enclosure.
Ð 346260 Timed relay actuator for door lock in 4 DIN modular enclosure.

Generic actuator Door lock actuator Timed actuator

346210 346230 346260

APARTMENT INTERFACE
It gives the possibility of installing a dedicated apartment
system, independent from the apartment block riser. In the
apartment, it will therefore be possible to install a video door
entry system with dedicated private external pushbutton
panels / cameras, possibly also integrated with the home
automation system. Device in 4 DIN modular enclosure.

Apartment interface
346850

SYSTEM EXPANSION INTERFACE

It gives the possibility of increasing the number of devices
connected to the 2 WIRES system, of reaching the maximum
installation distances, of generating risers with independent
audio, and expanding the apartment system performance.

System expansion interface

346851

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 1.3-4

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

The accessory devices

RELAY MODULE
It gives the possibility of operating "non-standard" door locks.
The device must be connected to the (S+/S-) clamp of the
speaker module of the entrance panel.

Relay module
346250

COAX / 2 WIRES INTERFACE

Can connect the cameras with 12 Vd.c. power supply (consumption
150 mA max) and coaxial video output (1 Vpp @ 75ohm) to the video 2
WIRES BUS. The interface directly powers the camera. The device may
be used as separate camera interface. In order to associate a camera
to an audio entrance panel, it will be enough to configure the interface
and the entrance panel with the same configurator in the P position.

Coax / 2 wires interface

347400

Video internal unit

Audio video node F441 Power supply 346050

SCS

2
2
2

V+ V- + - V+ V- + -
COAX

COAX
PWR

PWR

1.4-1
ADDITIONAL RINGTONE
Can repeat the audio/video door entry call in several rooms.
The connection is completed with 2 wires directly connected to the clamps.
Available in "neutral” finish, wall mounted installation without the need of additional accessories.

Neutral additional ringtone

336910

GUARD STATION
It's a tabletop device suitable for 2 wires multi-family systems
that provides access to the various apartment block video
door entry system services: intercommunication among
apartments, management of door locks and staircase lights,
monitoring of cameras installed in common areas. It has
a large 7" LCD colour display with icon menu, handset and
handsfree.
It gives the possibility of creating an internal unit, external
pushbutton panel and guard station address book.
It is possible to connect to the system up to 16 guard stations.

Guard station
346310

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 1.4-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

The system functions

THE CALL
When the call key of the entrance panel is pressed, the system generates a signal that is only recognised by the intended
recipient's internal unit/s (a period of 30 seconds is allowed to answer the call after the pressure of the key). The internal
units are uniquely configured. When the call is received, the internal unit rings and the monitor (if present) turns on.
When the connection key is pressed, or the handset is lifted, the communication with the entrance panel is established
(maximum conversation time 1 minute). When the communication key is pressed again, or the handset is replaced,
communication is interrupted and the monitor turns off.

Video door
entry call The internal unit rings and the
monitor turns on

CONVERSATION SECRECY
During the conversation between the entrance panel and the internal unit, any other entrance panels and internal units
not involved in the communication are temporarily excluded, therefore ensuring the privacy of the conversation. When a
call is made from a temporarily excluded entrance panel an engaged sound will indicated to the user that the internal line
is momentarily busy.

Apartment 1 Apartment 2

Communication

The conversation cannot be heard.

SIMULTANEOUS SWITCHING ON
With preset video internal units, simultaneous switching on of the monitors is also possible: when the call is received, all the
internal units ring and the monitors of all video internal units turn on. When the call is answered, only the monitor of the video
internal unit that has established communication with the entrance panel will stay on. For this function to be possible, all the
video internal units with the exception of one must be powered locally through the additional power supply unit, item 346020.

Video door
entry call

All the internal unit rings and their monitors switch on for the same call.
1.5-1
MASTER-SLAVE FUNCTION
All video internal units have a MASTER-SLAVE function: when the call is received, all the internal units ring but only the
monitor of the video internal unit set as MASTER switches on. When the auto-switching on key is pressed on a SLAVE,
the monitor of the MASTER internal unit switches off and the monitor of the SLAVE switches on (without necessarily
establishing communication with the entrance panel). When the connection key is pressed, or the handset is lifted, the
communication with the entrance panel is established (maximum conversation time 1 minute).

Master Slave

Video door
entry call

When a call is received, the MASTER switches on and rings, while the
slave only rings.
DOOR LOCK RELEASE
All internal units have a door lock key, which can be pressed to order the opening of one of the system locks. With the
system idle, pressing the key opens the door lock of the associated entrance panel (the association is completed using the
P configurator of the internal unit). In case of active call, it opens the door lock/actuator associated to the entrance panel
that has made the call.

Video door
entry call

The pressure of the door lock key opens the

AK

gate associated to the Internal unit

CL

RELEASE OF THE ADDITIONAL DOOR LOCK

In case of request of opening of one or more door locks in addition to the main one (directly connected to the speaker
module of the entrance panel), it will be necessary to use a specific actuator: generic actuator item 346210 or door lock
actuator item 346230 or 346260 (the latter offers better door lock timing flexibility when compared with item 346230).
The correctly configured actuator is controlled by the dedicated internal unit pushbutton. Critical electric locks may be
powered using an auxiliary transformer.

Door lock of the main Door lock of the secondary

entrance entrance

In order to use this function, a generic actuator, item 346210 (2 DIN) or a door lock actuator 346230 (2 DIN) / 346260 (4 DIN),
are required.
2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 1.5-2
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

The system functions

RELEASE OF 2 DOOR LOCKS WITH CODE-LOCK

By using the Sfera 353000 keypad module configured with M=3 - (and integrated in the external pushbutton panel with
the speaker module), it is possible to control the activation of 2 separate door locks with a numerical code. The device
manages both the door lock connected to the speaker module / AV module of the entrance panel, and any door locks
directly connected to the clamps of the local relay, item 353000 (the latter requires dedicated power supply).

Door lock of the main

entrance

Door lock of the secondary

entrance
ACTIVATION
Audio and video internal units have a dedicated key that controls (by default) an actuator item 346210 configured in
staircase light mode. The key may also be configured for other functions.

The staircase light function switches on the lamps of

the system connected to a certain actuator.

In order to use this function, a generic actuator, item 346210 (2 DIN) is required.

AUTO-SWITCHING ON
Pressing the auto-switching on key with the video internal unit idle will establish communication with the entrance panel
associated through the P configuration of the internal unit. Continue pressing the auto-switching on key to cycle through
the various entrance panels/cameras connected to the system.
The auto-switching on function is not available when the system is already "engaged" in a conversation between entrance
panel and internal unit.

Every time that the auto-switching on key

is pressed, the images displayed change.
1.5-3
INTERCOM CALL
The system offers an INTERCOM function, for communications of 3 min. maximum between video internal units:
Ð of different apartments
Ð of the same apartment.
If the apartment has an apartment interface 346850 or is a single-family unit, it is possible to separately call the individual
apartment video internal units. In this case, the INTERCOM connection can take place while other connections to the outside
of the apartment are also active. However, if the apartment has no apartment interface 346850, an apartment internal
unit can call all the internal units of the apartment itself, but the INTERCOM connection cannot take place while other
connections to the outside of the apartment are active. Any calls from the entrance panel or other apartments will take
priority, therefore stopping the INTERCOM communication.

Apartment 1 Apartment 2

Video door
entry call

GENERAL INTERCOM CALL

The general intercom call is only possible inside the apartment (therefore with interface 346850) or in a single-family
context. By appropriately configuring the video internal unit, with a specific device it will be possible to make an intercom
call to the other internal units of the apartment itself. The general intercom connection cannot be active at the same time
as other connections. Calls from the entrance panel will take priority, therefore stopping the INTERCOM connection.

Apartment xx

Intercom call

PRESET INTERCOM CALL

From the preset internal units of the apartment block system it is possible to send an INTERCOM call to one single internal
unit (for example the caretaker's internal unit). This internal unit receives intercom calls but CAN NOT send them.
Calls from the entrance panel will take priority, therefore stopping the intercom connection.

CUSTODE
– + 1 2 3 4

Preset intercom call

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 1.5-4

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

The system functions

PAGER FUNCTION (NOTIFICATION)

The function can be activated only inside the apartment (therefore with interface 346850) or in a single-family context. This
function (only available with handsfree devices) gives the possibility of broadcasting a voice message from the microphone
of the audio/video internal unit (preset internal units only) to the speakers of the sound system. To activate briefly press
the ”Connection” key while the device is in the idle condition. The activation of the function is confirmed by the green LED
coming on. Audio activates automatically.

Mr. Rossi
is desired To disable the function press the
at the office... ”Connection” key again.

CALL REPETITION ON SMARTPHONE

In single and multi family systems with Classe 300EOS and Classe 100X video internal units it is possible to set the
forwarding of the video call to a smartphone (android and Ios). The video internal unit integrated Wi-FI connectivity allows
connection with a mobile device. The dedicated Home + Security App can be downloaded free from the digital stores
(Google Play & Apple Store). Classe 300EOS / Classe 100X internal units give the possibility of managing the system both
while at home and when out: taking video/audio entrance panel calls, electric door lock control and activation of any
cameras connected to the video/audio door entry system using a smartphone.

DOOR ENTRY

Camera

Modem
router Wi-Fi
Serrature

SERRATURA

Chiama Casa

App dedicata per

iOs ed Android
Cloud
Legrand

PROFESSIONAL STUDIO (OFFICE) FUNCTION

This function is used mainly in the service sector (offices, GP Doctors surgeries, professionals), and in all those situations
when the opening of the gate or the entrance door is required without physical interaction with the internal unit. When a
person rings from the entrance panel, the internal unit rings, the video if present switches on and the associated door lock is
activated without the need for anyone to press the internal unit door lock key.
- In order to use this function, the internal unit must be configured appropriately, after which it can be enabled/disabled as needed.
– It cannot be activated together with the DOOR STATUS function.

The person rings The internal unit rings

using the entrance and automatically
AK

panel. opens the associated The gate opens

CL

door lock

1.5-5
DOOR STATUS FUNCTION
Using internal units equipped with a specific notification LED and the door lock actuator item 346260 installed in the
system, it is possible to control the status of doors and gates. When the gate is open, the notification red LED flashes; when
the gate is closed the LED is off. In case of control of 2 or more entrances, the LED is off when all of them are closed, and
is on when at least one of them is open.
It cannot be activated together with the PROFESSIONAL STUDIO (OFFICE) function.

Flashing

OFF

FLOOR CALL FUNCTION

The internal units (audio and video) of the 2 WIRES system make it possible to take advantage of the CALL TO THE FLOOR
function; by connecting a pushbutton to the clamps (ET / ), it is possible to use the ringtone of the devices to make
calls from the apartment entrance door. In installations with internal units connected in parallel, only the internal unit to
which the call pushbutton is connected will ring.

The person rings using the pushbutton The internal unit operates
outside the door. as a bell for the call from
outside the door.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 1.5-6

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

The system functions

INTEGRATION WITH NETATMO CAMERAS

Function available with CLASSE 300EOS (344842) and CLASSE 100X (344682) connected video internal units.
Thanks to the Wi-Fi connectivity and device interoperability, it is possible to integrate the connected video internal
units with Netatmo indoor and outdoor smart cameras. The association with NETATMO cameras allows to use the face
recognition function, when a call is received from the entrance panel and it can show if someone is in your home. The
integration allows to display the BTicino and Netatmo camera video in an integrated way from a single App: Home +
Security. Through the same App, it is also possible to manage the products of the Netatmo security range (outdoor and
indoor cameras, door and window sensors, indoor siren and smoke detector). This allows you to quickly and easily create a
Smart security system.

Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

NETATMO
Smart indoor
camera

NETATMO
Smart outdoor
camera

The configuration to associate the devices is very simple and no extra wiring/accessory is required. For both video internal
units, it is necessary to have the credentials (Username & Password) of the Netatmo account previously created.

1.5-7
VIDEO DOOR ENTRY ANSWERING MACHINE FUNCTION
Function only available when using the Classe 300EOS (344842) video internal unit. Activate the answering system
to record a film clip of the visitor who was looking for you. The recorded videos are available and visible by the user on the
video internal unit screen or on the Home + Security App together with the date and time.
It is also possible to record an audio message to play back on the entrance panel in case of unanswered call.

We are temporarily
absent...

PUSH TO TALK FUNCTION

If the entrance panel is in a particularly noisy zone/position, during the communication it will be possible to enable the
PUSH TO TALK function (it can be activated only from the preset handsfree internal units), which will provide a better
quality of communication. The function can be enabled / disabled directly from the internal units (enabling / disabling
procedure available on the individual technical specifications).

SAFE DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

This function is available with Classe 100 NOTE: when the function is
audio and video internal units and with Classe active, all the keys (in all the
configurations requiring the
300EOS video internal unit.
activation of a door lock) are
When it is active, it prevents the opening of the
BTICINO

disabled, and when they are

V.le Borri, 231
21100 (VA) ITALY

electric door lock connected to the entrance pressed the white LED flashes.
panel, when the internal unit is in stand-by.
BTICINO
V.le Borri, 231
21100 (VA) ITALY

The electric door lock opens only when the

BTICINO

entrance panel and the internal unit are in

V.le Borri, 231
21100 (VA) ITALY

audio communication.
Slave Master
ON =
ON
1

2 1 5M 1 BUS
CTS
2
N

To activate the function, it is necessary to move

P M

the appropriate microswitch (located on the

Slave Master
ON =
ON
1

2 1 5M 1 BUS
CTS
2

2-1

ON =
back of the internal unit) to the position .
N

Slave Master ON OFF

P M
ON
1

2 1 5M 1 BUS
CTS
2
N
P M

2-1

NOTE: the "Safe Door Lock" function CANNOT

ON OFF
2-1
ON OFF

be activated together with the “Professional

Studio (Office)” function.
2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 1.5-8
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

The system functions

GUARD STATION
Available for multi-family installation, the 2 WIRES guard station offers central management and supervision of the various
apartment block video door entry system services. Using this device, it is possible to communicate with the apartments,
manage the door lock control, switch on the staircase lights, monitor the cameras connected to the common sections of
the system, and any alarms from apartments or common areas. It is possible to connect to the guard station an additional
bell type ringtone for call forwarding purposes. The device has a customisable address book for internal units, entrance
panels and any other connected guard stations.
The internal unit calls the guard station using the AUTO-SWITCHING ON key. In case of handsfree internal units, when the
guard station operator lifts the handset the internal unit rings, and when the CONNECTION key is pressed it is possible to
speak with the guard station operator.
With internal units with handset, 2 different situations can occur:
- Call with the handset down (same behaviour as handsfree internal units)
- Call with the handset lifted: when the guard station operator lifts the handset, on the internal unit it will be necessary to
put down and then lift the handset again to communicate.
If the guard station is engaged, the call is placed into a queue and will be managed by the guard station operator, who will
select it from the call list.

Alarm management

Receiving a call from the

entrance panel
Camera display

Staircase
light
AK

switching on
CL

Door lock release

Intercom
calls

SERVICE INTERNAL UNIT (Only systems with Guard station)

The service internal unit is an internal unit associated to the guard station that allows the operator, for example caretaker
or receptionist, to also answer entrance panel calls. This could be the internal unit of their own apartment or office.

1.5-9
2 GENERAL RULES FOR INSTALLATION
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

System layout

GENERAL INFORMATION
The first step for the installation of an electric/audio or video door entry system is to design and complete a good basic
setup. Appropriate arrangement of cables, conduits, boxes, technical rooms and control points, all make the installation
and the future addition of new devices, and system expansions easier. Irrespective of the type of system and the required
applications, it is necessary for the installer to have available a map of the premises and a summary idea of the furniture
arrangement. It is also important to check that the expectations of the estimate match the reality of the site. The
realisation of the system must take into account factors that depend on the installation characteristics of a "BUS" system:

1. Marking of conduits;
2. The type of wiring;
3. Coexistence of cables inside conduits.

200 cm

1
90 cm

200 cm

90 cm

internal unit 2
Apartment 2
junction box

internal unit 1 entrance

panel
Apartment 1
power supply

3 BUS cable
for video door
entry system

2.1-1
SELECTION AND POSITIONING OF THE
ELECTRICAL PANEL
The arrangement of the electric systems inside the Wall mounted and flush mounted guard stations
building brings the need to group in one single central
point all the active devices (power supply units,
interfaces, guard stations, etc.) that contribute to the
control and the management of all functions. This
position must be sized taking into account the following
general rules:

1. allow enough extra space for the installation of

further devices that may be needed in the future;
2. install the power supply units in the lowest guard
station position, to facilitate the dispersion of any
heat;
3. The guard station must be capable of dissipating a
power higher than the sum of powers dissipated by
all the devices that it will house.
BTicino offers a wide range of guard stations suitable
for all kinds of needs, depending on capacity and
installation requirements (flush or wall mounted). For
installation in new or existing buildings (restorations),
on one or several floors, for which the creation of a
technical room for the electrical panel of the home is
planned, it will be possible to choose either wall or
flush mounted control panels or guard stations.

For the purpose of the calculation of the dissipated

power, all BTicino guard stations and control panels
meet the requirements of the CEI 23- 51 standard.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.1-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

SELV double insulation safety devices

In addition to entrance panels and internal units, the All BTicino devices have double insulation.
system also requires a few accessories, also connected Compliance with SELV classification is only guaranteed
using the 2 WIRES system. subject to FULL COMPLIANCE with current installation
The "2 wire" system meets the SELV (Safety Extra Low standards, and with the GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES
Voltage) class, as it is powered with double safety for the individual devices and cables making up the
insulation independent power supply units without earth system, outlined by BTicino.
connection, with maximum operating voltage of 25 Vac.
(effective), or 60 Vdc, non-sinuous.

Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

2.2-1
Installation of entrance panels

ENTRANCE PANEL HEIGHT the usual 160-165 cm, with the lens pointing down. This
will improve image quality.
When installing the entrance panel, the pushbutton panel
In low lit rooms, the installation of an additional light
should be positioned at a height of 160 - 165 cm (top
source is recommended.
wire).
The camera must not be installed facing light sources, or
in locations where the area being shot is very backlit. Note: For the use of external pushbutton panels by people
with disabilities, the recommended height is 120 - 125 cm
If this condition cannot be met, the image will show low
(top wire) - ref. (M.D 236/89).
contrast in the darker areas. This is due to the fact that
the brightness is adjusted on the light area of the image. Recommended installation height, unless different
In order to resolve these problems, we recommend that standards are specified.
the camera is installed at a height of 180 cm, instead of

NO

160 – 165 cm

(115 cm) - (96°)

(60 cm) - (60°) (351300)
(351200) (352400)
(85 cm) - (80°) 50 cm
(343081/91)

160 cm

(105 cm)
(92°)
(351200)

(140 cm)
(105°)
(343081/91)
The use of Sfera and Linea 3000 entrance panels with
wide angle camera makes it possible to expand the (240 cm)
(135°)
shooting field, increasing the security of your home. (351300)
(352400)

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.3-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Installation of internal units and DIN devices

INTERNAL UNIT HEIGHT DIN DEVICES

When installing the audio or video internal unit, we DIN rail interfaces and devices cannot be installed in wells.
recommend a height of 160 - 165 cm (top wire). An appropriate sealed frame with DIN rail is required for
their installation (DIN guard station).

INT 346850

INT 346850
ON
EXT
ON OF F

INT 346850

ON
160 – 165 cm

EXT
ON OF F
ON
EXT
ON OF F

Note: For the use of audio or video internal units by people

with disabilities, the recommended height is 120 – 125 cm
(top wire)

Recommended installation height, unless different

standards are specified.

2.4-1
The cable

The 2 WIRES system is easy to wire. Thanks to the

NON-POLARISED 2 WIRES wiring of each part of the
system, connection is simple, easy and fault-proof. The
336904/336905 white BUS-SCS cable has purposely
been designed and manufactured for the installation
of SCS video door entry systems. This cable is used for
the distribution of the power supplies and the operating
signals to all BUS devices. It consists of a white external
sheath with two brown and brown/white flexible twisted
conductors (0.50 mm2 section). It is sold in a 200 m coil.
Therefore, it is suitable to be used in:
Ð Free air installation, inside trunking, trays, and conduits;
Ð Inside masonry walls, in appropriate conduits;
Ð Underground, in appropriate conduits

Cable channels, trays and conduits must meet the 336904/336905 CABLE

regulatory requirements for the specific type of

installation.

The 336904/336905 cable makes it possible to reach

the maximum distance between the entrance panel
and the last internal unit.

Cohabitation with other cables Cable underground installation

Although the construction of the cable guarantees the The 336904/336905 cable can be installed underground
necessary electrical insulation for cohabitation with 400 (protected inside appropriate conduits), together with
V system cables, there is no guarantee of immunity from other signal cables, for voltages <50V. Installation of cable
electromagnetic disturbance, which may occur when the 336904/336905 together with power cables with energies
cable is installed inside the same conduits as the energy >50V is strictly forbidden. Failure to comply with the
cables. It is recommended that the BUS/SCS cable and installation requirements shall entitle BTicino to reject all
the power cables are installed in different conduits.. liabilities on the operation of the systems installed.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.5-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

THE CABLES THAT CAN BE USED

BTicino recommends the use of the 336904/336905 cable for reaching the maximum installation distances, and to ensure
a good quality of the video signal.
Other types of cables may be used, provided that the following requirements are met:

CABLES USED

Can be installed
Type of cable Item Audio systems Video systems
underground
336904 Recom- Recom-
BTicino twisted cable - section 0.50 mm2 YES
336905 mended mended

BTicino twisted cable - section 0.35 mm2 L4669 NO Can be used Can be used

Telephone twisted pair - section 0.28 mm2 < 1mm2 NO Can be used Can be used

Normal sheathed not twisted cables - section ≥ 0.28

NO Can be used Can be used
mm2 < 1mm2

Normal sheathed not twisted cables - section = 1mm2 NO Can be used Can be used

BTicino UTP5 cable 032751 NO Can be used Can be used

UTP5 Multi-pair cable NO Can be used Can be used

BTicino multi-pair green cable Green 336900

NO Can be used Can be used
(pair of cables: green/white-green) White-green 336903

During the restructurings and refurbishments of old door entry systems, it will be possible to use a pair of existing
cables, therefore significantly reducing costs and installation times:

Removal of the existing entrance panel Use of an existing pair of wires to connect the
new 2 WIRES entrance panel

2.5-2
Physical configuration - general information

Configuring means programming the system; this is done The configurators can be purchased in kit
by allocating ID numbers and operating modes to the
devices.
I
This is done by inserting configurators (with numbers
from 0 to 9) in the appropriate sockets, using an extractor 0-9I
(3502) found in the configurator bag or purchased 3501%
3502
separately, or by completing the configuration through the
software (recommended). or individually
1 2 3 4 5 6

When no configurator is inserted, the configuration is 1 2 3 4 5 6

zero. S J
3501/1
7 3501/2
8 3501/3
9 03501/4 L 3501/5 M 3501/6
A P

S J
In the system there are two different numbering systems, 7 8 9 0 L M
A P
to identify the entrance panels (EP) and the internal units
3501/7 3501/8 3501/9 3501/0 3501/SLA 3501/JMP
(IU) respectively.
The numbering system of the entrance panels (0-95) is
normally indicated with P, while the internal unit address
(0-99) is normally indicated with N. Example of a configured system and its operation
In addition to the P address, on the entrance panels it is
Apartment 1 Apartment 5
also necessary to configure the N address of the internal
=– =–
unit from which to start to call. N
=1
N
=5
P =– P =1
In addition to the N address, on each internal unit it is also
necessary to configure in P the associated entrance panel,
which is the entrance panel to which the door lock and
auto-switching on command will be sent when the internal
unit is off. auto switching on, apartment 5
auto switching on, apartment 1

Idle door lock release and

Idle door lock release and

Call to the apartment 1

Call to the apartment 5

Should it become necessary to change the configuration

of a device, in addition to removing the configurators also
disconnect the power supply to the whole system, wait one
minute and then reconnect the power supply. There are also
specific configurations for every device, which are discussed
in details in the technical data sheets of the individual items.

=– =–
P P
=– =1
=– =–
N N
=1 =1
S =– S =–
T =– T =–
M=– M=–
JMP JMP
JMP JMP

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.6-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Configuration of entrance panels

All the entrance panels must be physically configured by Only for Sfera New/Robur entrance panels:
inserting configurators. Sfera entrance panels can also be
M - enabling/disabling of call tones and door lock release
configured in advanced mode (using the PC and the specific
tones, and management of night lighting always ON
TiSferaDesign configuration software).
The M configurations gives the possibility of managing the
CAUTION : the configuration of the device completed using entrance panel call and door lock release tones . It also
physical configurators CANNOT BE MODIFIED in advanced gives the possibility of enabling night backlighting always
mode. ON (light sensor disabled).
The sockets of the internal units where the configurators
J1 - activation of call pushbutton columns
must be inserted are normally the following:
The J1 configurator gives the possibility of managing the
P - entrance panel number Call pushbuttons of the speaker module as follows:
The configurator in socket P of the EP assigns to this a
JMP CONNECTED = Only the right pushbutton column is
recognition number inside the system. The numbering
enabled
of the entrance panels must always start from P=0. The
entrance panel configured with P=0 must be a common (or JMP DISCONNECTED = Both pushbutton columns are
main) entrance panel. enabled (right + left)
N - call number J2 - additional EP power supply
Assigns the correspondence between the entrance panel Configurator J2 gives the possibility of enabling the
pushbuttons and the audio internal units or video internal additional power supply (1-2) of the speaker module in the
units. In common entrance panels made using pushbutton following mode :
modules, 1 must be inserted in N of the speaker module.
JMP CONNECTED = Additional power supply disabled
T - door lock time control
JMP DISCONNECTED = Additional power supply enabled
The configuration of T defines the door lock release
activation time. NOTE: the above are general indications. We recommend
S - type of call signal that you refer to the device configuration sections in the
The configuration of S determines the call tone of internal corresponding technical data sheets for the individual
units. One can thus differentiate the calls from different devices.
entrance panels.

SFERA

LINEA 3000

2.7-1
ADVANCED CONFIGURATION OF THE
SFERA NEW/ROBUR ENTRANCE PANELS
The Sfera New/Robur entrance panels may be configured
in advanced mode using the PC and the specific
configuration software (TiSferaDesign).

The advanced configuration offers a high level of

customisation of the device in terms of: flexible menu
composition, text customisation, apartment call / direct
guard station call (if present) key position customisation. USB Connection
Residents' contact address book, including the details of
the door badges assigned and the access codes.

For the connection to the PC, use a standard USB - mini

USB cable. The software configures, programs, and
updates the device Firmware. Sfera entrance panels have
mini USB front connection, making it possible to carry out
all operations without having to remove the pushbutton
panel.

The TiSferaDesign programming software can be

downloaded free of charge from the website:
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com

CAUTION: for correct functionality, it is recommended

to carry out all the configuration operations with the
pushbutton panel powered by BUS.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.7-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Internal unit configuration

All the internal units (audio and video) must be physically

configured by inserting configurators. Classe 300EOS video
internal units can also be configured in advanced mode
(directly from the touch screen), through the appropriate
configuration section available on the device.

CAUTION: the device configuration made with physical

configurators CANNOT BE MODIFIED using the menu.

The sockets of the internal units where the configurators

must be inserted are normally the following:
N - internal unit number
The configurators connected to the N sockets of the
internal units assign an identification number within the
system to each audio and video internal unit. The internal
units must be configured in progressive order.
P – entrance panel association
The configurators connected to the P sockets of the
internal units identify the associated EP, which is the first
entrance panel that switches itself on when the pushbutton
is pressed the first time, as well as which door lock is
activated when pressing the door lock pushbutton while the
audio internal unit is idle.
M / MOD – operating mode
The configurators in the M / MOD sockets of the internal
units assign the operating modes to the configurable
device keys.
J1 – additional power supply
The (JMP) configurator in J1 is used to enable/disable the
additional power supply according to the following mode:
JMP CONNECTED = Additional power supply disabled
JMP DISCONNECTED = Additional power supply enabled
J2 - MASTER/SLAVE function
The (JMP) configurator in J2 is used to activate/deactivate
the MASTER / SLAVE function according to the following
mode:
JMP CONNECTED = MASTER
JMP DISCONNECTED = SLAVE

NOTE: the above are general indications. We recommend

that you refer to the device configuration sections in the
corresponding technical data sheets for the individual
devices.

2.7-3
AUDIO SYSTEMS
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Audio systems

GENERAL LIMITS
Below are the maximum limits that can be reached by an AUDIO 2 WIRES system when using apartment interfaces
(346850) and system expansion interfaces (346851).

96 Entrance panels

39 Risers with independent audio

100 Apartments with interface 346851 on the riser

3900 Apartments (100 interfaces 346850 for riser)

3 Internal units for each apartment

5 Internal units for each apartment (with interface 346850)

20 Internal units for each apartment (with interface 346850 + interfaces 346851)

AUDIO 2 WIRES WIRING

2 WIRES systems are obtained by shunting the 2 WIRES
IU
BUS to connect internal units and entrance panels.
The connection of the devices can be at any position
in the system. Twisted cables are not necessary when
connecting the devices.

POWER SUPPLY

EP

Audio system connection mode

2.8-1
AUDIO SYSTEMS
EXAMPLE OF TYPE 1 SYSTEM
To complete an audio system, it is necessary to purchase:

Ð Entrance panel
Ð Internal unit
Ð Power supply
Ð Configurators

Notes:
- connections with 2 non-polarised wires;
- devices that can be connected at any positions on the system.
Audio
internal unit

Power supply 346040

2 BUS

Entrance panel

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.8-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Audio systems

EXAMPLE OF TYPE 2 SYSTEM

To complete an audio system, it is necessary to Audio internal unit BUS Audio internal unit
purchase:

Ð Entrance panel
Ð Internal unit
Ð Power supply
Ð Configurators

Notes:
- connections with 2 non-polarised wires;
- devices that can be connected at any positions on the 2
system.

Audio internal unit Audio internal unit

Power supply 346040

2 2

Entrance panel 1 Entrance panel 2 Entrance panel 3

2.8-3
POSSIBLE AUDIO SYSTEMS

AUDIO SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY 346040

MAX 72 INTERNAL
UNITS
PRI PRI

BUS

346040
PRI 110 - 240 V 50 - 60 Hz 370 mA
- 225 mA
BUS 26.0 V 600 mA BUS

Power supply 346040

Entrance Panel

• (only 1 entrance panel)

• For the different installation combinations refer to the
Audio
general installation rules. internal unit

AUDIO SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY 346050

OR APARTMENT INTERFACES
MAX 100 INTERNAL UNITS
Power supply 346050
Entrance Panel
Audio internal
unit

INT 346850

EXT
ON

• (only 1 entrance panel) ON OFF

• For the different installation combinations refer to the

general installation rules. Apartment interface

EXAMPLES OF AUDIO SYSTEMS:

Up to 100 internal units maximum may be connected in audio system with 1 entrance panel. For example it is possible
to connect:
• 100 Apartments with 1 IU (or apartment interface 346850)
• 80 Apartments with 1 IU (or apartment interface 346850); 10 Apartments with 2 IU (80 + (10x2)= 100).
• 71 Apartments with 1 IU (or apartment interface 346850), 10 Apartments with 2 IU, 2 apartments with
3 IU and 1 actuator for generic loads (71 + (10x2) + (2x3) + 3 = 100).

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.8-4

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Audio systems

POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS – AUDIO SYSTEMS

AUDIO SYSTEMS MAX. 72 INTERNAL UNITS (with system power supply 346040)

SFERA ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEY MODULES / EXPANSION KEY 346993 / UNIVERSAL PORTER 346991
SFERA +
UNIVERSAL PORTER
SFERA KEY EXPANSION
346991
346993

Max. No. of internal Max. No. of nameplate Max. No. of internal units with
Max. No. of entrance panels Max. No. of internal units
units modules 346991 + 346992

1 72 1 72 56

2 60 2 64 56

3 52 3 56 40

4 44 4 48 32

1 main + 2 secondary 52 3 64 48

1 main + 3 secondary 48 4 56 48

1 main + 4 secondary 40 5 48 48

NOTES:

– All the combinations are calculated with entrance panels (both main and secondary) with modules with 8 call keys.
- The main entrance panels are those that can call all the internal units, while secondary entrance panels can only
call some internal units.
- Systems with "main and secondary" entrance panels HAVE NO independent audio (this means that only 1
communication session at the time is guaranteed).
- The number of call keys for each secondary EP is calculated by dividing the total number of IU that can be
installed by the total number of secondary EP (secondary EP consisting of modules with 8 keys, like the main EP).
- In sizing the systems, it will be necessary to also take into account the introduction of other components: these
will take away further IU from the system:
Ð for each additional plate module (in addition to the already indicated ones), it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each generic load actuator 346210 or call repeater, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each door lock actuator 346230, it will be necessary to remove 3 IU;
Ð for each floor call interface 346833, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each special control, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU.

In view of the many installation possibilities, the values shown on the table are only indicative.
For correct sizing of the system, we recommend the use of the YouDiagram software -
which can be downloaded free of charge from www.bticino.com.

2.8-5
POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS – AUDIO SYSTEMS
AUDIO SYSTEMS MAX. 100 INTERNAL UNITS (with system power supply 346050)

SFERA ENTRANCE PANELS WITH KEY MODULES / EXPANSION KEY 346993 / UNIVERSAL PORTER 346991
SFERA +
UNIVERSAL PORTER
SFERA KEY EXPANSION
346991
346993
Max. No. of internal units
Max. No. of entrance Max. No. of nameplate
Max. No. of internal units Max. No. of internal units with
panels modules
346991 + 346992

1 100 1 96 100 (*)

2 92 2 96 64 (*)

3 84 3 96 50

4 76 4 96 38

5 64 5 96 30

6 56 6 88 22

1 main + 2 secondary 92 1 96 76

1 main + 3 secondary 84 1 96 48

1 main + 4 secondary 76 1 96 48

(*) in systems with more than 56 keys, allow for 2 separate pushbutton panels.

NOTES:

– All the combinations are calculated with entrance panels (both main and secondary) with modules with 8 call keys.
- The main entrance panels are those that can call all the internal units, while secondary entrance panels can only
call some internal units.
- Systems with "main and secondary" entrance panels HAVE NO independent audio (this means that only 1
communication session at the time is guaranteed).
- The number of call keys for each secondary EP is calculated by dividing the total number of IU that can be
installed by the total number of secondary EP (secondary EP consisting of modules with 8 keys, like the main EP).
- In sizing the systems, it will be necessary to also take into account the introduction of other components: these
will take away further IU from the system:
Ð for each additional plate module (in addition to the already indicated ones), it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each generic load actuator 346210 or call repeater, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each door lock actuator 346230, it will be necessary to remove 3 IU;
Ð for each floor call interface 346833, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each special control, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU.

In view of the many installation possibilities, the values shown on the table are only indicative.
For correct sizing of the system, we recommend the use of the YouDiagram software -
which can be downloaded free of charge from www.bticino.com.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.8-6

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Audio systems

POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS – AUDIO SYSTEMS

AUDIO SYSTEMS MAX. 100 INTERNAL UNITS (with system power supply 346050)

SFERA ENTRANCE PANELS WITH DISPLAY MODULES

SFERA includes:
SFERA includes : speaker module (351100)
speaker module (351100) +
+ display module (352500) + keypad module (353000)
display module (352500)
Max. No. of internal
Max. No. of internal Max. No. of name- units
Max. No. of entrance panels Max. No. of internal units
units plate modules without nameplate
modules

1 100 100 13 100

2 100 80 20 100

3 100 64 24 95

4 95 48 24 80

5 85 32 20 60

6 75 24 18 45

1 main + 2 secondary
100 88 11 100
with pushbuttons

NOTES:

– Each nameplate module manages 8 names/calls;

- The main entrance panels are those that can call all the internal units, while secondary entrance panels can only call
some internal units.
- Systems with "main and secondary" entrance panels HAVE NO independent audio (this means that only 1
communication session at the time is guaranteed).
– The number of call keys for each secondary EP is calculated by dividing the number of IU that can be installed by the
total number of secondary EP (secondary EP consisting of modules with 8 keys).
- In sizing the systems, it will be necessary to also take into account the introduction of other components: these will
take away further IU from the system:
Ð for each additional plate module (in addition to the already indicated ones), it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each generic load actuator 346210 or call repeater, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each door lock actuator 346230, it will be necessary to remove 3 IU;
Ð for each floor call interface 346833, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each special control, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU.

In view of the many installation possibilities, the values shown on the table are only indicative.
For correct sizing of the system, we recommend the use of the YouDiagram software -
which can be downloaded free of charge from www.bticino.com.

2.8-7
System performance - audio systems

The following pages give a general indication of the For situations or installation conditions other
maximum distances that can be reached depending on than the ones listed in this document, the current
the type of cable used. consumptions can be calculated using the YouDiagram
software (which can be downloaded free of charge
from: www.professionisti.bticino.it

AUDIO SYSTEMS- MAX. 72 INTERNAL UNITS

The device connection is non polarised.
The use of conductors with sections other than the prescribed ones does not guarantee correct performance of the system.

MAX DISTANCE - LINE C - FURTHEST INTERNAL UNIT - POWER

The furthest
SUPPLY
internal unit

BTicino cable L4669

Cable section mm2

BTicino cable
0.35 mm2
0.28 mm2

0.5 mm2
336904

1 mm2
72 Internal units 105 m 115 m 165 m 335 m
60 Internal units 125 m 135 m 195 m 395 m
52 Internal units 140 m 155 m 220 m 450 m
LINE C*

44 Internal units 160 m 170 m 240 m 490 m

346040 MAX DISTANCE - LINE B - POWER SUPPLY - ENTRANCE PANEL

BTicino cable L4669

PRI PRI
Cable section mm2

BUS

346040

BTicino cable
PRI 110 - 240 V 50 - 60 Hz 370 mA
- 225 mA
BUS 26.0 V 600 mA BUS
LINE A**

0.35 mm2
0.28 mm2

0.5 mm2
336904

1 mm2
72 Pushbuttons 130 m 140 m 190 m 365 m
60 Pushbuttons 135 m 145 m 200 m 385 m
52 Pushbuttons 145 m 155 m 225 m 435 m
LINE B *

44 Pushbuttons 155 m 175 m 235 m 455 m

Entrance MAX DISTANCE - LINE D - SPEAKER MODULE - DOOR LOCK

panel
BTicino cable L4669
Cable section mm2

BTicino cable
0.35 mm2
0.28 mm2

0.5 mm2
336904

1 mm2

S+ S- clamps 30 m 30 m 50 m 100 m
(*)LINE D Door lock NOTE: with EP made using universal speaker unit 346991,manage
the door lock control using actuator 346230.
System made with System with
audio modules: existing pushbutton panel:
„ SFERA „ Universal speaker unit 346991
„ Power supply 346040 „ Additional pushbutton module
346992
„ Power supply 346040
(*) max variable distance
(**) Maximum distance variable according to the number of installed
devices and their absorption. Max 1000 meters with cables of 1mm2
section. In general Line A = Line B + Line C
2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.9-1
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

System performance - audio systems

AUDIO SYSTEMS - MAX. 100 INTERNAL UNITS

The device connection is non polarised.
The use of conductors with sections other than the prescribed ones does not guarantee correct performance of the system.

The tables show the distances for an audio system with

The furthest
INT 346850 346851
at least one interface (in bold), and for the audio system
internal unit EXT
ON
without interfaces.
ON

ON OFF
ON OFF

MAX DISTANCE - LINE C - FURTHEST INTERNAL UNIT

The furthest The furthest - POWER SUPPLY
apartment system expansion
interface 346850 module 346851

Cable section

BTicino cable

BTicino cable
0.35 mm2
0.28 mm2

0.5 mm2
336904

1 mm2
L4669
mm2
100 Internal units 100 m 100 m 110 m 110 m 150 m 150 m 320 m 320 m
(*) Line A

(*)Line C

66 Internal units 120 m 120 m 130 m 130 m 190 m 190 m 380 m 380 m
50 Internal units 140 m 150 m 150 m 160 m 200 m 250 m 450 m 450 m
26 Internal units 140 m 180 m 150 m 190 m 200 m 320 m 450 m 560 m
346050

MAX DISTANCE - LINE B - POWER SUPPLY

- ENTRANCE PANEL
Cable section

BTicino cable

BTicino cable
0.35 mm2
0.28 mm2

0.5 mm2
336904

1 mm2
L4669
mm2

100 pushbuttons 100 m 100 m 110 m 110 m 180 m 180 m 310 m 310 m
(*) Line B

66 pushbuttons 130 m 130 m 140 m 110 m 200 m 240 m 420 m 420 m

50 pushbuttons 140 m 150 m 150 m 160 m 200 m 250 m 450 m 450 m
26 pushbuttons 140 m 200 m 150 m 210 m 200 m 290 m 450 m 580 m
Line A = Line B+Line C with Line A max = 1000m without interfaces
346850 and 346851
Apartment
interface
INT 346850
MAX DISTANCE - LINE A WITH INTERFACES 346850 AND 346851
346850
BTicino cable L4669

EXT
Cable section mm2

ON

ON OFF
BTicino cable
0.35 mm2
0.28 mm2

0.5 mm2
336904

1 mm2

System
expansion
346851
module 140 m 150 m 200 m 450 m
ON 346851
ON OFF
MAX DISTANCE - LINE D - SPEAKER MODULE - DOOR LOCK
BTicino cable L4669
Cable section mm2

BTicino cable
0.35 mm2
0.28 mm2

0.5 mm2

(*) Line D
336904

1 mm2

Door lock

System made with AUDIO modules: S+ S- clamps 30 m 30 m 50 m 100 m

„ SFERA
„ Power supply 346050 NOTE: with EP made using universal speaker unit 346991,
manage the door lock control using actuator 346230.
System with existing pushbutton panel:
„ universal speaker unit 346991
„ additional pushbutton module 346992 (*) max variable distance
„ Power supply 346050

2.9-2
VIDEO SYSTEMS
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Video systems

GENERAL LIMITS
Below are the maximum limits that can be reached by an VIDEO 2 WIRES system when using apartment interfaces
(346850) and system expansion interfaces (346851).

96 Video entrance panels

39 Risers with independent audio

100 Apartments with interface 346851 on the riser

3900 Apartments (100 interfaces 346850 for riser)

15 Entrance panels or cameras for apartment (16 in the one-family system)

3 Internal units for each apartment

5 Internal units for each apartment (with interface 346850)

10 Internal units for each apartment (with interface 346850 + interfaces 346851)

CAUTION: for info regarding the correct installation and use refer to the technical sheets of the individual devices.

The distance between the entrance panel and the furthest internal unit must not exceed 200 metres.

ON
OFF OFF

ON
OFF
Floor shunt
200 m

Video Entrance Panels

2.10-1
 VIDEO 2 WIRES WIRING
2 WIRES video systems can be installed with star wiring using floor shunt 346841;
in-out or mixed wiring is also possible as an alternative.

STAR WIRING IN-OUT WIRING

Star wiring is completed by connecting the individual - IN-OUT wiring is completed directly on the clamp of
apartment to an output of floor shunt 346841. the devices connected to the system. Each riser must
Each line must be terminated by positioning the micro- be terminated by positioning the microswitch of the last
switch of the last device to ON. internal unit to ON.
Star wiring is particularly suited to multifamily systems
IN-OUT wiring is particularly indicated for one and two
with several dwellings on the same floor, and to multifamily
family systems, and for vertical or horizontal multi-family
systems where maximum distance between entrance panel
systems (dwellings in rows).
and all internal units is required.
Up to 3 internal units can be connected to each output of
the floor shunt.

Allocate an output of the floor shunt to each internal unit

with simultaneous switching on, or installed with tabletop
base.

STAR wiring IN-OUT wiring

ON ON ON
Internal Apartment 1 Apartment n
Apartment 5
unit BUS
ON ON
Apartment 2 Apartment 6
ON ON OFF Apartment 2
Apartment 3 Apartment 7
ON ON
Apartment 4 Apartment 8

OFF Apartment 3

OFF Apartment 4
346841 346841
2 WIRES BUS

Internal unit BUS

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.10-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Video systems

VIDEO 2 WIRES WIRING

MIXED WIRING ON
Apartment n
The two previously described wiring methods can be
combined for the realisation of more complex systems.
Mixed wiring (IN-OUT and Star) makes it possible to
wire systems in a way that meets most installation Apartment 3 Apartment 2
OFF
requirements.
ON
The outputs of the floor shunts may be used to connect
an individual device, or to generate an apartment line
(on which it will be possible to connect up to 3 devices
OFF
without apartment interface 346850).
Using the IN-Out method, it will be possible to connect OFF
floor shunts or internal units to the internal unit BUS.

The allocation of the internal units to the apartments is

completed through the configuration.

Apartment 1

ON

346841
ON

IU BUS

2.10-3
VIDEO SYSTEMS
EXAMPLE OF A SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY 346050

IU BUS
Notes:
- Connection with 2 non-polarised wires
- A maximum of 3 connections are possible on the (IU BUS
Video internal unit
) and (TK BUS ) clamps of power supply unit 346050, (2
entrance panels + 1 riser, or 1 entrance panel + 2 risers).

Power supply 346050

Entrance panel

BUS TK BUS PI
2 2

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.10-4

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Video systems

EXAMPLE OF A SYSTEM WITH AUDIO VIDEO NODE F441

The F441 audio/video node must be used in conjunction with power supply unit 346050, when the system includes more
than 2 entrance panels or when more than 2 risers are required.
In case of tabletop installation or internal units with simultaneous switching on, assign a dedicated audio/video output to
each video internal unit.

Notes:
- Connection with 2 non polarised wires.
- Up to 26 internal units and 6 floor shunts, item 346841,
may be connected to each riser connected to the output of
the F441 audio/video node.

Video internal unit

Risers

2
2
2
2

Entrance panel Power supply 346050

A/V node SCS

2 F441 2

For correct sizing of the system, we recommend the use of the YouDiagram software -
which can be downloaded free of charge from www.bticino.com.

2.10-5
EXAMPLE OF APARTMENT BLOCK SYSTEM WITH 2 RISERS
For the installation of multifamily video systems, it is possible to use the floor shunt item 346841.
It allows significant savings on the cable being used.
It is particularly suited to multifamily systems with several dwellings on the same floor, and to multifamily systems with
high distance between entrance panel and internal units.
Using the star connection method, the floor shunt makes it possible to connect up to 3 apartment internal units
(max 1 internal unit for each output with simultaneous switching on).

Riser 1 Riser 2
APARTMENT X + 3

APARTMENT 2 Video internal unit

Video internal unit

2 Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

2
2 Apartment X+2
2
APARTMENT 1
2 Apartment X+1
Video internal unit

2 Apartment X

346841

Entrance panel Power supply 346050

2 2

BUS TK BUS PI
2 2

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.10-6

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Video systems

VIDEO SYSTEM WITH POWER SUPPLY 346050

MAX.64 CLASSE 100 INTERNAL UNITS OR

MAX. 100 APARTMENT INTERFACES
Audio/video node Power supply
346050 Video Internal
Units

OUT

ON
IN

Entrance Panel
ON OFF

Apartment
interface

- (only 1 entrance panel)

- For different installation combinations refer to the general installation rules.

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS:

For the sizing of the system when using interfaces 346850 and 346851 galvanically insulated systems must be separated.
Interface 346850 is a galvanically insulated device. It therefore requires double power supply (1 device downstream and 1
device upstream the device).

For each galvanically insulated system, the indication of the tables of the following pages apply, considering, as first
approximation, interfaces 346850 and 346851 in the same way as an EP (for the part connected to the TK / IN BUS F441
audio/video node) and as an IU (for the part connected to the IU / OUT BUS F441 audio/video node).

However, we always recommend the use of the YouDiagram software to ascertain the feasibility of the system and
calculate absorptions.

The number of internal units varies depending on the number of entrance panels and actuators of the system. When
calculating the number of internal units that can be connected, also consider any devices (audio/video internal units,
bells/ringtones) connected in parallel.

EXAMPLES OF VIDEO SYSTEMS:

In a video system with 1 entrance panel, it will be possible to connect up to 64 entrance panels (Classe 100).
For example it is possible to connect:

- 64 Apartments with 1 IU (or 100 apartments with apartment interface 346850).

- 50 Apartments with 1 IU (or apartment interface 346850); 7 Apartments with 2 IU (50 + (7x2)= 64)

- 38 Apartments with 1 IU (or apartment interface 346850), 10 apartments with 2 IU, 1 apartment with
3 IU and 1 actuator for generic loads (38 + (10x2) + (1x3) + 3 = 64).

2.11-1
SYSTEM WITH AUDIO VIDEO NODE F441
In systems with more than 2 video entrance panels, audio/video node F441 must be used.

IU BUS

110 / 240 Va.c.

Power supply
346050

F441

SCS

Main or
secondary
audio Entrance
Main or secondary Panels
video Entrance Panels

Using the F441 audio/video node, it is possible to connect up to 4 video entrance panels and 4 risers. Audio entrance
panels can be connected to both the SCS clamp or the IN clamp of the audio/video node. The absorption of the
devices connected to the outputs of the audio/video node MUST be ≤ 720 mA.

In systems requiring a high number of internal units, it will be possible to use an additional power supply for local
powering of video Sfera entrance panels. Or it will be possible to expand the riser with system expansion interface
346851 and corresponding power supply unit.

In alternative to the video entrance panels (without local power supply), it is also possible to use native 2 WIRES
cameras and /or interfaces (347400) for the connection of cameras with COAX output.

The tables of the following pages show the video systems completed with the different types of internal units,
classed as follows:

- Classe 100 internal units;

- Classe 300EOS / Classe 100X connected internal units.

In multi-family systems, Classe 300EOS internal units MUST ALWAYS be used with local power supply (power
supply 346020).

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.11-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Video systems

POWER SUPPLY 346050 CONNECTION RULES

6 DIN power supply for audio, video or audio video mixed 2 PRI: 110 - 240 Vdc~
730 - 400 mA
WIRES systems. The output provides two power supplies in 50/60 Hz

low safety voltage (one on the 3 BUS TK, BUS PI and SCS
clamps, one on the 1 - 2 clamp) to be used alternately and
NOT at the same time.
The (BUS TK), (BUS PI) ans (SCS) outputs can be used at
the same time respecting the total maximum absorption of
1.2 A.
Up to a maximum of 3 connections/shunts are possible
on the (BUS TK) and (BUS PI) clamps (2 IU risers + 1 TK
maximum or 1 IU riser and 2 TK maximum).
The device can also be used as additional power supply (1 27 Vdc 28,5 Vdc

- 2 output) for the local power supply of the preset internal

units or entrance panels - in this case, it is NOT possible to
use other outputs.

EXAMPLE OF 1 EP + 1 IU RISER CONNECTION

110 - 240 Va.c.

IU riser

BUS

BUS TK BUS PI

EXAMPLE OF THE CONNECTION 1 EP + 2 IU RISERS

110 - 240 Va.c. IU riser (1) IU riser (2)

BUS

BUS TK BUS PI

2.11-3
POWER SUPPLY 346050 CONNECTION

EXAMPLE OF 2 EP + 1 IU RISER CONNECTION

IU riser
110 - 240 Vac

346050

BUS BUS

BUS TK BUS PI

EXAMPLE OF AUDIO VIDEO NODE F441 CONNECTION

IU riser

110 - 240 Vac

F441 346050

BUS

SCS

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.11-4

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Video systems

POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS (WIRING WITH FLOOR SHUNT)

MULTIFAMILY COLOUR BASIC VIDEO SYSTEMS
MAX NUMBER OF INTERNAL UNITS FOR SYSTEMS WITH SFERA NEW / ROBUR PUSHBUTTON PANELS

SFERA PUSHBUTTON SFERA PUSHBUTTON SFERA PUSHBUTTON SFERA PUSHBUTTON

PANELS PANELS PANELS INCLUDE: SPEAKER PANELS INCLUDE: SPEAKER
INCLUDE: INCLUDE: MODULE (351100) + MODULE (351100) +
SPEAKER MODULE + CAM- DISPLAY (352500) CAMERA (352400) + CAMERA (352400) + KEY
ERA + PUSHBUTTONS DISPLAY (352500) + EXPANSION (346993)
or KEYPAD (353000)
SPEAKER MODULE + OR
AUDIO/VIDEO + PUSHBUT- AUDIO/VIDEO
TONS (351200/351300) + DISPLAY
(352500) + KEYPAD
(353000)
No.of video colour entrance System power Additional power supply Max No. of internal units-system Max No. of internal units-system Max No. of internal units-system Max No. of internal units-system
panels supply for entrance panels only with CLASSE 100 IU only with CLASSE 100 IU only with CLASSE 100 IU only with CLASSE 100 IU

1 video 1 - 44 42 40 48
2 video 1 - 40 36 32 44
3 video 1 - 36 32 26 40
4 video 1 - 32 26 – 36
1 main video +
1 - 18 40 36 44
2 secondary audio or video
1 video 1 1 64 64 64 64
2 video 1 2 64 64 64 64
3 video 1 3 64 64 64 64
4 video 1 4 64 64 64 64
1 main video*
1 1(*) 56 56 56 60
2 secondary audio

(*) Additional power supply on main video EP.

CAUTION: the installation of Classe 300EOS internal units in multi family systems requires additional power supply for the video internal units.
Refer to the specific technical sheet.

NOTES:
– All the combinations are calculated with entrance panels (both main and secondary) with modules with 8 call keys.
- The main entrance panels are those that can call all the internal units, while secondary entrance panels can only call
some internal units.
- Systems with "main and secondary" entrance panels HAVE NO independent audio (this means that only 1
communication session at the time is guaranteed).
- The number of call keys for each secondary EP is calculated by dividing the total number of IU that can be installed by
the total number of secondary EP (secondary EP consisting of modules with 8 keys, like the main EP).
- In sizing the systems, it will be necessary to also take into account the introduction of other components: these will
take away further IU from the system:
Ð for each additional plate module (in addition to the already indicated ones), it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each generic load actuator 346210 or call repeater, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each door lock actuator 346230, it will be necessary to remove 3 IU;
Ð for each floor call interface 346833, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each special control, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU.

In view of the many installation possibilities, the values shown on the table are only indicative.
For correct sizing of the system, we recommend the use of the YouDiagram software -
which can be downloaded free of charge from www.bticino.com.

2.11-5
POSSIBLE COMBINATIONS (IN-OUT WIRING)
MULTIFAMILY COLOUR BASIC VIDEO SYSTEMS
MAX NUMBER OF INTERNAL UNITS FOR SYSTEMS WITH SFERA NEW / ROBUR PUSHBUTTON PANELS

SFERA PUSHBUTTON PANELS SFERA PUSHBUTTON PANELS SFERA PUSHBUTTON PANELS SFERA PUSHBUTTON PANELS
INCLUDE: INCLUDE: INCLUDE: SPEAKER MODULE INCLUDE: SPEAKER MODULE
SPEAKER MODULE + CAMERA DISPLAY (352500) (351100) + CAMERA (352400) (351100) + CAMERA (352400) +
+ PUSHBUTTONS + DISPLAY (352500) + KEYPAD KEY EXPANSION (346993)
or (353000)
SPEAKER MODULE + AUDIO/ OR
VIDEO + PUSHBUTTONS AUDIO/VIDEO (351200/351300)
+ DISPLAY (352500) + KEYPAD
(353000)

No.of video colour Additional power Max No. of internal units-system Max No. of internal units-system Max No. of internal units-system Max No. of internal units-system
System power
entrance panels supply for entrance only with CLASSE 100 IU only with CLASSE 100 IU only with CLASSE 100 IU only with CLASSE 100 IU
supply
panels
1 video 1 - 60 60 56 64
2 video 1 - 52 52 46 56
3 video 1 - 44 44 36 48
4 video 1 - 40 36 – 40
1 main video +
2 secondary audio 1 - 52 52 48 56
or video
1 video 1 1 64 64 64 64
2 video 1 2 64 64 64 64
3 video 1 3 64 64 64 64
4 video 1 4 64 64 64 64
1 main video*
1 1(*) 64 64 64 64
2 secondary audio
(*) Additional power supply on main video EP.

CAUTION: the installation of Classe 300EOS internal units in multi family systems requires additional power supply for the video internal units.
Refer to the specific technical sheet.

NOTES:
– All the combinations are calculated with entrance panels (both main and secondary) with modules with 8 call keys.
- The main entrance panels are those that can call all the internal units, while secondary entrance panels can only call
some internal units.
- Systems with "main and secondary" entrance panels HAVE NO independent audio (this means that only 1
communication session at the time is guaranteed).
- The number of call keys for each secondary EP is calculated by dividing the total number of IU that can be installed by
the total number of secondary EP (secondary EP consisting of modules with 8 keys, like the main EP).
- In sizing the systems, it will be necessary to also take into account the introduction of other components: these will
take away further IU from the system:
Ð for each additional plate module (in addition to the already indicated ones), it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each generic load actuator 346210 or call repeater, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each door lock actuator 346230, it will be necessary to remove 3 IU;
Ð for each floor call interface 346833, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU;
Ð for each special control, it will be necessary to remove 1 IU.

In view of the many installation possibilities, the values shown on the table are only indicative.
For correct sizing of the system, we recommend the use of the YouDiagram software -
which can be downloaded free of charge from www.bticino.com.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.11-6

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Video systems

SINGLE FAMILY OR MULTIFAMILY COLOUR VIDEO SYSTEMS WITH APARTMENT INTERFACE 346850: MAX.
NUMBER OF INTERNAL UNITS

SFERA SFERA A/V LINEA 2000 LINEA 3000

Max. No. of internal Max. No. of internal Max. No. of internal Max. No. of internal
No.of private video
System power supply units-system with Classe units-system with Classe units-system with Classe units-system with Classe
entrance panels
100 and CLASSE 300EOS 100 and CLASSE 300EOS 100 and CLASSE 300EOS 100 and CLASSE 300EOS

1 video 1

2 video 1
5
3 video 1

4 video (*) 1

(*) Only for single family systems (without apartment interface).

General rules for single family systems:

- By configuring the EP with (S = 9), general call / call forward is set to all the IU at the same time.

- When more than 1 IU is installed in the home, the configuration of the IU must start from (N=1), while the EP must
be configured (in addition to S = 9), with (N = 1).

- To switch the IU on at the same time, each secondary IU must be powered locally.

NOTES:
• Only 1 CLASSE 300EOS / Classe 100X connected internal unit can be installed in the system;
• Only 1 internal unit with video answering machine can be installed in the system.
• If the entrance panel is configured for general call (S = 9), the internal unit with video answering machine must be
the one configured with (N = 1).
• The system requires the activation of the call repetition through the APP on one video internal unit

2.11-7
System performance - single family video systems

MAXIMUM DISTANCES AND CABLE FEATURES

CAUTION!
The use of conductors with characteristics other than the prescribed ones does NOT guarantee correct performance
of the system and good quality of the video signal.

The furthest internal unit

346850 346851 346851

INT 346850 346851 346851

EXT
ON
ON ON

ON OFF
ON OFF ON OFF

(*) Max variable distance

LINE D (*)
LINE A (*)

346050
LINE B (*) LINE C (*)

BTICINO CABLES
BTicino
BTicino BTicino
C9881U/5E
L4669 336904
336905
AWG24
0.35 mm2
UTP5
LINE A 50 m 145 m 200 m
LINE B 50 m 80 m 200 m
LINE C 25 m 65 m 200 m
LINE D 50 m – 50 m

OTHER CABLES
One PTT OneSYT OneSYT GIGA TW OneSYT Cable Cable
278 TP +Digital +Num TP CAT5E +Num TP ARB.6060-1 EV6R
1 mm2
>0.2 mm TP
0.28 mm 2
0.28 mm 2
5/10 5/10 AWG24 8/10 6/10 6/10
LINE A 50 m 140 m 200 m 150 m 200 m 50 m –
LINE B 50 m 115 m 115 m 80 m 200 m 50 m –
LINE C 25 m 50 m 100 m 65 m 200 m 50 m –
LINE D 50 m 30 m 30 m – – – 100 m

In systems where the EP is replaced by apartment interface 346850,

and where the distance (B) is less than 1 m, the (C line) can reach the
maximum distance of 200 m when using the cable 336904.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.12-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

System performance - multi family video systems

MULTI-FAMILY VIDEO SYSTEMS MADE ONLY WITH CLASSE 100 AND CLASSE 300EOS WITH NETATMO INTERNAL UNITS.

CAUTION!
The use of conductors with characteristics other than the prescribed ones does NOT guarantee correct performance of
the system and good quality of the video signal.

346850
INT 346850
The furthest internal unit
EXT
ON

ON OFF

346851
346851
346851

346851

ON

ON
ON OFF

(*) Max variable distance

ON OFF

LINE D (*)
LINE A (*)

346050
LINE B (*) LINE C (*)

MAXIMUM DISTANCE ( LINE A), ENTRANCE PANEL MAXIMUM DISTANCE (LINE B) ENTRANCE PANEL
- FURTHEST INTERNAL UNIT - POWER SUPPLY
A pair of the multi-pair

A pair of the multi-pair

Telephone twisted
2 normal cables

data cable CAT5

336904/336905

>0.2 mm2 or L4669

Telephone twisted
pair 0.28 mm2
BTicino cable

2 normal cables

data cable CAT5

336904/336905

pair 0.28 mm2

>0.2 mm2

BTicino cable
0.5 mm2

0.5 mm2

2 IU/2 pushbuttons 50 m 200 m 140 m 180 m

5 IU/5 pushbuttons 50 m 200 m 140 m 155 m 2 pushbuttons 50 m 200 m 130 m 95 m
10 IU/10 pushbuttons 50 m 200 m 140 m 145 m 5 pushbuttons 50 m 190 m 120 m 85 m
26 IU/26 pushbuttons 50 m 200 m 140 m 125 m 10 pushbuttons 50 m 180 m 110 m 80 m
38 IU/38 pushbuttons 50 m 200 m 140 m 110 m 26 pushbuttons 50 m 150 m 100 m 70 m
38 IU/ display call 50 m 200 m 140 m 115 m 38 pushbuttons 50 m 140 m 90 m 65 m
64 IU/ display call 50 m 200 m 140 m – Display call 50 m 150 m 95 m 65 m
MAXIMUM DISTANCE (LINE C), POWER SUPPLY MAXIMUM DISTANCE (LINE D) ENTRANCE PANEL
- FURTHEST INTERNAL UNIT - DOOR LOCK
BTicino cable L4669
A pair of the multi-pair
Telephone twisted pair

336904/336905
Bticino cable
2 normal cables

data cable CAT5

336904/336905
BTicino cable

0.28 mm2

0,35 mm2

0.5 mm2
>0.2 mm2

1 mm2
0.28 mm2
0.5 mm2

(S+/S–) clamps 30 m 30 m 50 m 100 m

2 IN/OUT IU 50 m 200 m 140 m 95 m
5 IN/OUT IU 50 m 200 m 135 m 90 m
- Risers with max 26 internal units should be made in
10 IN/OUT IU 50 m 190 m 130 m 85 m systems with more than 26 internal units.
26 IN/OUT IU 50 m 170 m 120 m 75 m
- Classe 300EOS with Netatmo must be always installed
5 IU ( SHUNTED) 50 m 200 m 110 m 80 m with additional power supply (2- 1).
10 IU ( SHUNTED) 50 m 175 m 100 m 70 m
- For correct sizing of the system, we recommend the use
26 IU ( SHUNTED) 50 m 145 m 80 m 60 m of the YouDiagram software which can be downloaded
38 IU ( SHUNTED) 50 m 125 m 70 m 50 m free of charge from www.professionisti.bticino.it
64 IU ( SHUNTED) – 95 m 55 m –

2.13-1
MAXIMUM DISTANCES AND CABLE FEATURES - SYSTEMS MADE WITH AT LEAST 1 CLASSE 300EOS IU

CAUTION!
The use of conductors with characteristics other than the prescribed ones does NOT guarantee correct performance of the
system and good quality of the video signal.

346850
INT 346850 The furthest internal unit
EXT
ON

ON OFF

346851
346851
346851

346851

ON

ON
ON OFF

(*) Max variable distance

ON OFF

LINE D (*)
LINE A (*)

346050
LINE B (*) LINE C (*)

MAXIMUM DISTANCE ( LINE A), ENTRANCE PANEL MAXIMUM DISTANCE (LINE B) ENTRANCE PANEL
- FURTHEST INTERNAL UNIT - POWER SUPPLY

A pair of the multi-pair

A pair of the multi-pair

>0.2 mm2 or L4669

Telephone twisted
Telephone twisted

2 normal cables
2 normal cables

data cable CAT5

data cable CAT5

336904/336905
336904/336905

pair 0.28 mm2

pair 0.28 mm2

BTicino cable
BTicino cable
>0.2 mm2

0.5 mm2
0.5 mm2

2 IU/2 pushbuttons 50 m 200 m 140 m 180 m 2 pushbuttons 50 m 200 m 130 m 95 m

5 IU/5 pushbuttons 50 m 200 m 140 m 155 m 5 pushbuttons 50 m 190 m 120 m 85 m
10 IU/10 pushbuttons 50 m 200 m 140 m 145 m 10 pushbuttons 50 m 180 m 110 m 80 m
18 IU/18 pushbuttons 50 m 200 m 140 m 125 m 18 pushbuttons 50 m 170 m 105 m 75 m
16 IU display call 50 m 200 m 140 m 110 m Display call 50 m 150 m 95 m 65 m

MAXIMUM DISTANCE (LINE C), POWER SUPPLY MAXIMUM DISTANCE (LINE D) ENTRANCE PANEL
- FURTHEST INTERNAL UNIT - DOOR LOCK
A pair of the multi-pair
Telephone twisted pair

BTicino cable L4669

336904/336905
2 normal cables

data cable CAT5

336904/336905

Bticino cable
BTicino cable

0.28 mm2

0,35 mm2
>0.2 mm2

0.28 mm2

0.5 mm2
0.5 mm2

1 mm2

2 IN/OUT IU 50 m 200 m 140 m 95 m (S+/S–) clamps 30 m 30 m 50 m 100 m

5 IN/OUT IU 50 m 180 m 115 m 75 m - If all the Classe 300EOS internal units in the system
10 IN/OUT IU 50 m 140 m 90 m 60 m are supplied locally the system should be considered
18 IN/OUT IU 50 m 90 m 50 m 35 m as being made with Classe 100 internal units only (see
5 IU ( SHUNTED) 50 m 160 m 95 m 70 m previous page).
10 IU ( SHUNTED) 50 m 120 m 80 m 55 m - Risers with max 26 internal units should be made in
16 IU ( SHUNTED) 50 m 80 m 45 m 30 m systems with more than 26 internal units.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.13-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

System performance - multi family video systems

VIDEO SYSTEMS WITH AMPLIFIER 346870 (ONLY WITH NOT TWISTED CABLES)

The use of line amplifier 346870 makes it possible to install systems with non-twisted cables longer than 50 metres (up to
a maximum of 100 metres). Its use is ideal in restorations and in the repair of existing systems.
- The signal amplifier must be connected using non-twisted cables with section ≥ 0,28 mm2 , non polarised.
- The signal amplifier must be connected at the 50th metre distance from the entrance panel. Connections at shorter
distances can cause a distortion of the video signal, while at longer distances they would be pointless. In case of use of
audio/video nodeF441, to avoid signal distortions on the inputs of the node that do not require amplification (< 50 m), we
recommend to connect item 346870 only to the B line of the inputs to amplify.
- Up to 18 internal units may be installed downstream the amplifier.

The furthest
internal unit
Furthest apart-
ment interface MAX. DISTANCE LINE A
INT 346850
ENTRANCE PANEL - FURTHEST INTERNAL UNIT
ON
EXT

Without 346870
ON OFF

With 346870
PI P2 P3
346870
LINE C*

IN OUT

50 m 100 m

MAX. DISTANCE LINE C

THE FURTHEST INTERNAL UNIT- POWER SUPPLY
LINE A*

346050
Without 346870

With 346870

50 m 100 m
F441 346050
LINE B *

MAX. DISTANCE LINE D

EP ENTRANCE PANEL - DOOR LOCK
336904/336905 0.5 mm2
BTicino SCS cable L4669

BTicino SCS cable

0.35 mm2
0.28 mm2

1 mm2

S+ S- clamps 30 m 30 m 50 m 100 m

LINE D* Door lock

(*) max variable distance

2.13-3
System expansion with interfaces

Audio and video 2 WIRES systems can be expanded thanks to three different types of interfaces:

APARTMENT INTERFACE 346850

It gives the possibility of installing a dedicated 2 WIRES
system independent from the apartment block riser.
The system downstream the interface (internal to the
apartment/dwelling) can have dedicated entrance
panels and cameras.
It is possible to make intercom calls inside and outside
the apartment using preset internal units.
346850

SYSTEM EXPANSION INTERFACE 346851

It gives the possibility of creating up to 39 isolated risers
with independent audio and video. It can also be used
to expand the maximum physical limits of the system
(maximum distance 600 m with BTicino cable 336904), or
to increase the number of devices that can be connected
to the BUS.
It is possible to connect up to a maximum of 3 interfaces
in cascade.
346851

2 WIRES / IP INTERFACE 346891

It gives the possibility of installing very extended mixed
2 WIRES / IP systems with a large number of devices
(entrance panels, internal units and interfaces).
The system will have an IP backbone and 2 WIRES risers.
The IP backbone must be dedicated to the door entry
system. Thanks to the IP guard station (software), it
makes it possible to manage advanced functions.
346891

CAUTION: the interface is NOT compatible with Classe

300EOS and HOMETOUCH internal units.
ONLY use in systems with Classe 100 internal units.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.14-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

System expansion with interfaces

EXAMPLE OF USE OF THE INTERFACE 346850

Example of connection for the installation of an apartment system independent from the apartment block system.
In this way, the apartment system can have private cameras and entrance panels, and can be integrated with home
automation applications..
The use of apartment interface 346850 makes it possible to have independent audio intercom inside the apartment.
This gives the possibility making intercom calls inside the apartment that will not be interrupted if the main EP calls
another apartment.

APARTMENT BLOCK SYSTEM

Riser for
apartment block
2

Apartment
interface
346850
2
Entrance panel for
apartment block

Apartment
2 interface
346850

Power supply
346050
2

BUS TK BUS PI
2

2.14-2
 SYSTEM OF APARTMENT 2

Video internal unit

Power supply 346050

BUS TK BUS PI 2
2

Video internal unit

2
2

Apartment
entrance panel

SYSTEM OF APARTMENT 1

Audio video node F441 Power supply 346050 Video internal unit

SCS
2

2
2

COAX / 2 wires
interface
347400

Apartment entrance max 3 m CAMERA 1

panel

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.14-3

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

System expansion with interfaces

EXAMPLE OF 346851 INTERFACE CONNECTION (MOD=5)

It must be used in apartment blocks, to install 2 WIRES risers with riser entrance panels.
With this solution, audio and video are independent from the other risers.

COMMON SYSTEM SECTION

Power supply
346050
System expansion
interface 346851

configured with
MOD= 5

BUS TK BUS PI
2

2
System expansion
interface 346851

configured with
2 MOD= 5 2

Common entrance
panel

2.14-4
To the internal units/riser To the internal units/riser
interfaces346850 interfaces346850

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

Power supply Power supply

346050 346050

SCS SCS
2 2
2

2 2
2

Riser entrance Riser entrance

panel 1 panel 2

To other interfaces 346851

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.14-5

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

System expansion with interfaces

EXAMPLE (1) OF INTERFACE 346851 CONNECTION IN LINE EXPANSION MODE (MOD=0)

It must be used to expand the system, in order to:

„ Regenerate the video signal, with the possibility of a further 200 m after the interface (with cable 336904/336905)
„ Increase the number of devices connected to the BUS

Notes:
- 200 m with BTicino cable 336904/336905
- Up to a maximum of 3 interfaces 346851 in cascade (600 m max.)
- In the (A) line, interface 346851 must be considered as an internal unit
- In the (B) line, interface 346851 must be considered as an entrance panel

Power supply
346050
200 m MORE
LINE (B)

BUS TK BUS PI
2 2 IU BUS

System expansion
interface 346851

configured with
MOD= 0

Entrance panel
LINE (A)
200 m

Power supply 2
346050

BUS TK BUS PI
2

2.14-6
EXAMPLE (2) OF INTERFACE 346851 CONNECTION IN SYSTEM EXPANSION MODE (MOD=0)

Notes:
- in order to reach the maximum distance, it is necessary to use the BTicino cable 336904/336905
- The IN clamp of system expansion modules with MOD = 0
must be connected to a dedicated output of the
Max 1 interface 346851
audio/video node item F441 or the floor shunt 346841 (configured with MOD= 0)
(as an internal unit with local power supply). for each output
Power supply
346050

Audio/video
node
F441
To other A/V nodes F441, To other A/V nodes F441,
interfaces or internal units interfaces or internal units

SCS

2
200 m

2 2

Interfaces
346851
configured
with MOD=0

2
200 m

2
2 2

Power supply
346050
Audio/video
Entrance panel node
F441

SCS
2 2

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.14-7

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

System expansion with interfaces

GENERAL RULES FOR DISTANCE CALCULATION

The maximum possible distance for video systems For the calculation of the maximum system distances,
(between the furthest EP and IU) is 600 m when using it will be necessary to identify the galvanically insulated
the BTicino cable 336904/336905. sections, identify the A, B and C lines of each section,
For audio systems, the maximum distance is 1350 m and find on the table (system performance) the
when using 1 mm2 section sheathed cables. The call maximum permitted distance based on the items
signal can cross up to 2 interfaces 346851 (and max. 1 installed and the cable used. Below are some examples
apartment interface 346850). of identification of the LINES.

SYSTEM WITH APARTMENT INTERFACE 346850

Last internal unit

INT 346850
or last apartment
interface
346850
ON
EXT
ON OFF

2
LINE A Apartment
system
LINE C

LINE B LINE C

INT 346850
LINE A

2 ON OFF
EXT
ON

346850 Power supply 346050

Power supply
346050

2
LINE B

Entrance
panel

Riser for
apartment
block

Note: the apartment block riser and the apartment system are galvanically isolated.

2.14-8
SYSTEM IN EXPANSION WITH INTERFACE 346851
It is possible to use a maximum of 3 interfaces 346851 on the A LINE. When calculating distances in case of
and 346850 in cascade, taking into account that several crossing of three interfaces, it must be decided which
interfaces 346850 cannot be connected in cascade to interface will not repeat the signal. In this mode, it is
each other. By interfaces in cascade, we mean those not considered in the identification of LINE A .
crossed by an audio / video connection (entrance panel
- internal unit). Only two interfaces (any) can repeat
the signal, meaning making available another 200 m

Galvanically isolated section Galvanically isolated section Galvanically isolated section

Last internal unit or Last internal unit or Last internal unit or

apartment interface apartment interface apartment interface

INT 346850 INT 346850 INT 346850

ON ON ON
EXT EXT EXT
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

346850 346850 346850

LINE C

LINE C

LINE C
LINE A

LINE A

LINE A
Power supply Power supply Power supply
LINE B

LINE B

LINE B

Galvanically isolated section

Entrance
panel Power 346851 Power Last
supply MOD= 0 supply system
expansion
module
346851 346851 346851

346851

346851 346851 346851

ON ON ON

ON
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

MOD= 5 MOD= 5 MOD= 5

ON OFF

LINE B LINE C LINE B LINE C

LINE A LINE A

INT 346850

ON
EXT
ON OFF

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.14-9

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

System expansion with interfaces

AUDIO SYSTEMS WITH SYSTEM EXPANSION INTERFACE 346851

The system expansion interface gives the possibility of increasing the length of the line of an audio door entry system
and/or creating risers with independent audio.

Internal unit or Apartment Internal unit or Apartment

interface
346850

interface
INT 346850 INT

346850 346850
EXT EXT
ON
ON

ON OFF
ON OFF
Max. X addresses "N"

(N =86) to (N=99)
System expansion System expansion mod-
module MOD= 0 ule MOD= 0
346851 346851

ON

346851 ON

346851
Line A – Max. 100 addresses "N”

ON OFF ON OFF
Example from (N =00) to (N=99)

Apartment interface Apartment interface

346850 346850
346850 346850
INT INT
Line B – Max. (100–X) addresses "N”

EXT EXT
ON ON

ON OFF ON OFF
(N =00) to (N=85)

Internal Unit Internal Unit

System expansion System expansion

module MOD= 5 module MOD= 5
346851 346851

346851 346851
ON ON

ON OFF ON OFF

Max. 39 risers with independent audio

2.14-10
VIDEO SYSTEMS WITH SYSTEM EXPANSION INTERFACE 346851
The system expansion interface gives the possibility of increasing the length of the line of a video door entry system,
of creating risers with independent audio, and of increasing the number of devices that can be connected to the riser.

Internal unit or Apartment Internal unit or Apartment

346850
INT 346850 INT

EXT
ON
interface EXT
ON
interface
346850 346850
ON OFF
ON OFF
Max. 36 video IU or "X"
interfaces 346850

Interfaces 346850
(N =87) to (N=99)
(N =65) to (N=99)
Video IU
346851

System expansion 346851

System expansion
ON
module MOD= 0 ON
module MOD= 0
346851 346851
ON OFF ON OFF
Example (N=00) to (N=64) Video IU
Line A – Max. 100 addresses "N”

INT 346850
Apartment interface INT 346850
Apartment interface
346850 346850
Line B – Max. 64 video IU or (100–X) interfaces 346850

EXT EXT
ON ON

ON OFF ON OFF
Esempio (N=00) to (N=86) Interfaces 346850

Internal Unit Internal Unit

346851
System expansion 346851

System expansion
ON module MOD= 5 ON
module MOD= 5
346851 346851
ON OFF ON OFF

Max. 39 risers with independent audio

It is possible to connect up to a maximum of 3 expansion interfaces 346851 in cascade. If only

interfaces 346850 are used on the riser, the limit of IU goes from 64 to 100 (without expansion
interface 346851 configured with MOD = 0).

For the calculation of the maximum number of video IU that can be connected to each individual line (without local power
supply), we recommend the use of the YouDiagram – which can be downloaded free of charge from www.bticino.com.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.14-11

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

System expansion with interfaces

MAXIMUM USE LIMITS FOR INTERFACES 346850 AND 346851

It is possible to connect up to a maximum of 3 expansion interfaces 346850 or 346851 in cascade. By interfaces in
cascade, we mean those crossed by an entrance panel / internal unit, or internal unit / internal unit (intercom) audio /
video connection.
Only 2 of these (to be chosen by the installer) will repeat the signal for 200 metres; the maximum distance between the
entrance panel and the furthest internal unit is 600 m. Each Line (EP / interface, interface / interface, and interface / IU) is
200 m maximum (with BTicino cable 336904/336905).

EXAMPLE 1

3 Internal
INT 346850
unit
EXT
ON

ON OFF

346850

Internal
unit
s
max 200m

tep
Entrance panel

3 s
2 OK
346851
max 200m
1 ON 346851
MOD=5
ON OFF

346851

346851
ON

ON OFF

MOD=0

max 200m max 200m

EXAMPLE 2
Apartment 3

If the Apartment 3 B IU calls apartment 2, all

2 1
the IU (C and D) of the apartment ring, but
A B
346850 346851
INT

EXT
ON ON
answering will only be possible from IU C (IU
D is after the 4th interface).
ON OFF ON OFF

346850 346851
Internal unit MOD=0 Internal unit

Apartment 2

3 4
INT 346850

C 346851

D
EXT
ON ON

ON OFF ON OFF

346850 346851
s
Internal unit MOD=0 Internal unit
step
4
NO
Entrance panel

Apartment 1

INT 346850

E F
EXT
ON

ON OFF

346850
Internal unit Internal unit

2.14-12
MAXIMUM USE LIMITS FOR INTERFACE 346891

CAUTION: the interface 346891 is NOT compatible with Classe 300EOS and HOMETOUCH internal units.
ONLY use in systems with Classe 100 internal units.

SYSTEMS WITH ENTRANCE PANELS ONLY

Interface 346891
Entrance
panel

SCS SCS SCS

ETH AV IN AV AV OUT DC

max 200m

Interface 346891
Entrance
panel
Interface Interface
346851 346851
SCS SCS SCS
ETH AV IN AV AV OUT DC

MOD = 0
346851 346851

ON ON

ON OFF ON OFF

max 600m

SYSTEMS WITH INTERNAL UNITS ONLY

Interface 346891
Last internal unit

SCS SCS SCS

ETH AV IN AV AV OUT DC

max 200 m

Interface 346891
Last internal unit

Interface Interface
346851 346850 or 346851
SCS SCS SCS
ETH AV IN AV AV OUT DC

346851 346851

ON ON

ON OFF ON OFF

max 600 m

SYSTEMS WITH ENTRANCE PANELS AND INTERNAL UNITS

Interface 346891
Entrance Last internal unit
panel

SCS SCS SCS

ETH AV IN AV AV OUT DC

max 200 m
max. 600 m with interfaces 346850 and 346851

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.14-13

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Configuration of interface 346850

APARTMENT INTERFACE 346850

The apartment interface is configured as a normal internal unit. It must be uniquely configured. There can be no internal
units or interfaces on the same riser configured in (N) with the same address of the interface. Downstream the apartment
interface, the internal units must be configured starting from (N=1), as the interface itself generates a general call (S=9).
346850 is configured at the factory with (M=3).

EXAMPLE

2 2
N= 7 N= 6
CORRECT CONFIGURATION

WRONG CONFIGURATION
2 2

N= 6 N= 5

2 2

N= 5 N= 5
346850
INT INT 346850

EXT EXT
ON ON

ON OFF

APARTMENT ON OFF
APARTMENT
SYSTEM SYSTEM
346850 346850

2 WIRES BUS 2 WIRES BUS

2.15-1
SYSTEM EXPANSION INTERFACE 346851

The configurator connected to the M socket sets the operating mode as indicated below:

„ MOD = 0 (equal to no configurator connected) - LINE EXPANSION MODE / EXPANSION NO. OF DEVICES ON BUS

„ MOD = 2 - ENTRANCE PANEL LINE EXPANSION MODE

„ MOD = 5 - INDEPENDENT RISERS MODE

„ MOD = 6 - EXTENDED RISER MODE

„ MOD = 7 - EXTENDED RISER EXPANSION MODE

Interface 346851 configured with (MOD=0) can be used for 2 different purposes.
- Physical line expansion (reachable distances);
- Expansion of the number of devices (EP and IU) that can be connected to the BUS.

MOD=0 (ELINE EXPANSION) MOD=0 (EXPANSION NO. OF DEVICES ON RISER)

2 IU BUS IU BUS (A) - Addresses from 0 to 49

110 - 240 Vac IU BUS (B)
346851 346050 IU BUS (B) - Addresses from 50 to 99
=–
M
=2
LINE 3
200 m

MOD = –
346851
110 - 240 Vac
346851 346050
ON
ON
=–
M
ON OFF
=1 346851

MOD = -

2 2 ON OFF
ON
LINE 2
200 m

ON OFF

2
110 - 240 Vac
346851

=–
M
=1
346851

MOD = –
ON
2
ON OFF
ON OFF

110 - 240 Vac

346050
2 IU BUS (A)
LINE 1
200 m

110 - 240 Vac

346050

EP BUS 2

EP BUS
2

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.15-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Configuration of interface 346851

MOD = 2 (ENTRANCE PANEL LINE EXPANSION)

This mode is used in systems with interface connection between the entrance panel and the F441 audio/video node, to
expand the line of the entrance panel.

To the Internal Units/interfaces

110 - 240 Vac

F441 346050

CENTRAL
A/V NODE

2 2

346851
346851

=–
ON OFF M
ON

ON OFF =1
MOD = 2

110 - 240 Vac

346050

EP BUS
2

MOD= 5 (RISERS WITH INDEPENDENT AUDIO)

Independent audio means that each EP can call 1 IU of the riser. In this way, it is possible to have up to 39 audio/video
conversations at the same time.
(M) is the progressive unique number that identifies the riser.

2 WIRES 2 WIRES 2 WIRES

INDEPENDENT RISER INDEPENDENT RISER INDEPENDENT RISER

Entrance Panel

MOD = 5 MOD = 5 MOD = 5

346851
M = 1 346851
M = 2
346851
M = 39
ON
ON ON

ON OFF
ON OFF ON OFF

346851 346851 346851

2 2 2

2.16-1
MOD = 6 (EXTENDED RISER)
MOD = 7 (EXTENDED RISER EXPANSION)
These configuration modes (used together), give the possibility of expanding the riser line up to the logic limit of 300
riser internal units (3 lines of 100 audio IU each). In video or mixed audio/video systems, for the first 2 lines the limit
of 100 IU is subjected to the use of apartment interface 346850; the third line reaches the maximum limit of 64 video
IU.
It is NOT possible to install apartment interfaces 346850 on the third riser line.

IU BUS IU BUS

Internal Units Internal Units Internal Units Internal Units Internal Units
(301 – 399) (101 – 399) (601 – 699) (401 – 699) (701 – 999)
346851 346851
= – = –
M M
= 3 346851 = 6 346851

MOD = 7 MOD = 7
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON

ON OFF ON OFF

346850 346850 Note 1: It is possible to connect

up to a maximum of 3 expansion
INT 346850 INT 346850
interfaces 346850 and 346851
2 in cascade, 2 of which will
EXT
ON
2 EXT
ON

regenerate the signal.

Internal Units Internal Units
ON OF F ON OF F

(201 – 299) (501 – 599)

2 2
Note 2: when installing these
346851 346851
types of systems, we recommend
= – = – contacting the local Technical
M M
= 2 = 5
Support Service.
346851 346851

MOD = 7 MOD = 7
ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON

ON OFF ON OFF

346850 346850

INT 346850 INT 346850

2 ON
2 ON

Max . 100 interfaces 346850

EXT EXT

Internal Units Internal Units

ON OF F ON OF F

(101 – 199) (401 – 499)

2 2

346851 346851 346851

= – = – = –
M M M
= 1 346851 = 4 346851 = 7 346851

MOD = 6 MOD = 6 MOD = 6

ON
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
ON ON

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

2 2
EP BUS
(Main Entrance Panel)

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.16-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Configuration of interface 346891

The device must be configured in one of the two available modes:

- Physical configuration (with configurator connection)

- Software configuration using the appropriate application MyHOME_Suite (that can be downloaded free of charge from
the website www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com). This mode has the advantage of offering many more options when
compared with the physical configuration.

The following parameters must be configured:

C
M1 first part of the minimum internal unit address (00 - 99 - OFF) (*)
N2
N1 second part of the minimum internal unit address (00 - 99)

M2 M2 first part of the maximum internal unit address (00 - 99)

N2 second part of the maximum internal unit address (00 - 99)

N1
C IP guard station address (1 - 9)
M1
NOTE (*) If M1 = OFF, all the other sockets (N1, M2, N2) must not be configured: only entrance
panels must be connected to the interface.

When the interface configuration is completed using physical configurators, the physical address and the system address
are the same.
The advanced configuration using MyHOME_Suite makes it possible to exceed the 2 WIRES system address limit. This is
possible thanks to the allocation of a local basic address to IU (internal units) and EP (entrance panels).
These addresses make it possible to increase the maximum number of IU and EP that can be managed by the video door
entry system.

The physical configuration gives the user the possibility of accessing 3 operating modes:

MODE 1 - The device only manages automatically detected entrance panels and cameras.
The IP guard station number called (1-9) is inserted in the C socket.

MODE 2 - The device manages internal units with configurations between N1 and N2 and automatically detected
entrance panels/cameras.
This configuration is used in installations with risers with a low number of internal units and low address.
The IP guard station number called (1-9) is inserted in the C socket.

MODE 3 - The device manages internal units with address between M1 x 100 < IU < (M1 x 100) + 99.
The IP guard station number called (1-9) is inserted in the C socket. With this configuration mode, the maximum number
of devices that can be connected to the individual interface is 95 entrance panels and 3900 internal units.

NOTE: interface 346891 is configured at the factory with “forcing of call to the guard station” ACTIVE.
If the device is configured using physical configurators, calls from the entrance panel to the internal units are not allowed.

2.17-1
The advanced PC configuration using MyHOME_Suite enables the implementation of a higher number of functions, the
customisation of text and the complete use of the system performance levels.

To transfer the configuration made with the MyHOME_Suite software or update the device firmware, connect interface
346891 to the PC using a USB-micro USB cable.

The MyHOME_Suite software can be downloaded free of charge from the website: www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com.

SCS SCS SCS

ETH AV IN AV AV OUT DC

Interface performance according to the different configuration modes:

Physical Advanced

Max. No. of IU of the system (audio or video) 3900 10000

Max. No. of EP of the system 95 1000

Maximum address that can be called from

4000 10000
the EP

Max. No. of IP devices 100 (Note 1) 100 (Note 1)

Max. No. of IP guard stations 9 max. 100 IP devices (Note 2)

Advanced management of the physical and

NO YES
system addresses

Check the consistency of the configuration YES (Note 3) YES

Entrance Panel - Internal Unit direct call NO YES

Switching on readdressing NO YES

Camera scrolling NO YES

Note 1: the IP guard station can "weight" 2 to 4 IP devices as far as the activation or not of the Alarm logger and Alarm manager
services of the IP guard station itself;
Note 2: maximum no. of IP guard stations that can be installed, within the limit of 100 IP devices maximum, taking into account
what indicated in Note 1;
Note 3: the test must be completed using the "MyHOME_Suite" software.

CAUTION: the interface is NOT compatible with Classe 300EOS and HOMETOUCH internal units.
ONLY use in systems with Classe 100 internal units.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.17-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Wiring rules for Classe 300EOS / Classe 100X

connected video internal units
ONE-FAMILY INSTALLATION

Classe 300EOS /
2 Classe 100X
1 Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

346050

BUS TK BUS PI
2 2 2

- it does NOT require additional power supply of the Classe 300EOS / Classe 100X video internal unit
- Max 5 IU (of which ONLY 1 with call repetition on smartphone using the App).

TWO-FAMILY INSTALLATION

Classe 100X16E Home 1

2 Classe 300EOS Home 2

2
Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

1
346050

BUS TK BUS PI

- it does NOT require additional power supply of the Classe 100X video internal units
- ALL the Classe 300EOS video internal units require additional power supply
- ONLY 1 Classe 300EOS video internal unit with Home + Security App
- ONLY 1 Classe 300EOS / Classe 100X for each apartment
- ONLY 1 Classe 300EOS / Classe 100X for each local network
- Max. 3 IU per apartment (of which ONLY 1 with call repetition on smartphone using the App).
2.18-1
MULTIFAMILY INSTALLATION – APARTMENT BLOCKS TYPE 1

APARTMENT N

Classe 300EOS

Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

346020
1

APARTMENT 2

Classe 100X16E

2
IU BUS

346841
APARTMENT 1

Classe 300EOS

2 Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

2
346020
1

346841
2

2 WIRES - Additional power supply of the Classe 300EOS video internal unit required in multi-
riser family installations
- ONLY 1 Classe 100X internal unit for each local network
- ONLY 1 Classe 300EOS video internal unit with Home + Security App

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.18-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL INSTALLATION RULES

Wiring rules for Classe 300EOS / Classe 100X

connected video internal units
MULTIFAMILY INSTALLATION – APARTMENT BLOCKS TYPE 2

APARTMENT N

Classe 300EOS

Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

346020
1

Max. 3 IU per apartment (of which ONLY 1 with call repetition on smartphone ) using the App.

2
APARTMENT 2

Classe 100X16E

2
IU BUS

346841
APARTMENT 1

Classe 300EOS
2
Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

2
346020
1

346841
2

- Additional power supply of the C300EOS video internal unit required in multi-family
2 WIRES
installations
riser
- ONLY 1 Classe 100X for each apartment
- ONLY 1 Classe 100X for each LAN local network
- ONLY 1 Classe 300EOS video internal unit with Home + Security App

2.18-3
MULTIFAMILY INSTALLATION – APARTMENT BLOCKS TYPE 3

APARTMENT 1

2
2
346850 346050 Classe 300EOS

Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

IU BUS
F441 2 SCS

Max. 5 IU per apartment (of which ONLY 1 with call repetition on smartphone ) using the App.

2
APARTMENT N

Classe 100X16E
346841

346841

2 - Additional power supply of the Classe 300EOS video internal unit required in multi-family
installations
- ONLY 1 Classe 300EOS / Classe 100X for each apartment
2 WIRES - ONLY 1 Classe 300EOS / Classe 100X for each LAN local network
riser
- ONLY 1 Classe 300EOS video internal unit with Home + Security App

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 2.18-4

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 APARTMENT 18

344842
= 1 ON APARTMENT 16
N HOME 1
= 8
= – 344672 344842
P
= – ON 230 Vac ON 230 Vac
= 1 = –
= – MASTER ON N N
= 1
M = 6
= – = –
= – P
ON
PRI
P = – ON
ON = – = –
PRI

2-1 M MASTER
M = – = –
1- 2
MASTER
ON
2 1 2-1 1- 2

BUS
2 1 346020
BUS

APARTMENT 2
BUS
346841
344652
= –
ON N
= 2
= –
P
= –
ON
M = –
MASTER

BUS

APARTMENT 1
344282
346841
= –
N
ON = 1
= –
P
= –
M = –

110-240 Vac
BUS 346050

346841

S1
Abitazione
1
Abitazione PS1
2
 WIRING DIAGRAMS
344672
LIVING ROOM ON
= –
N
= 5
= – MASTER
P
= –
HOME 2 OFF
= – 344672
M
= – BEDROOM 1
= –
344682 BUS OFF N
= 4
OFF = – = –
N
= 2
MASTER P
= –
= – OFF
ON P = –
= - M
MASTER = – 344672 = –
M
= –
BEDROOM 2
= – BUS
N OFF
= 3
= – MASTER
P
BUS = – OFF
= – 344672
M KITCHEN
= –
= –
BUS N
OFF = 2
MASTER = –
P
OFF = –
= –
M
LIVING ROOM 344842 = –
= – BUS
N
= 1 OFF
= –
P ON
= –
= – MASTER
M
= –

BUS
3

1 2 3
1 2 3

346210

BUS

PS
 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Example 1 - The villa

ONE FAMILY VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM

WITH SMARTPHONE CALL REPETITION AND DOOR LOCK RELEASE KEY CARD

Classe 100 video internal unit

Video internal unit

Classe 300EOS with Netatmo

Power supply HOME + SECURITY

Entrance panel

Door lock release

key card

3.1-1
 344672
LIVING ROOM ON
= –
N
= 5
= – MASTER
P
= –
OFF
= – 344672
M
= – BEDROOM 1
= –
BUS OFF N
= 4
MASTER = –
P
= –
OFF
= –
M
344672 = –
BEDROOM 2
= – BUS
N OFF
= 3
= – MASTER
P
= – OFF
= – 344672
M KITCHEN
= –
= –
BUS N
OFF = 2
MASTER = –
P
OFF = –
= –
M
LIVING ROOM 344842 = –
= – BUS
N
= 1 OFF
= –
P ON
= –
= – MASTER
M
= –
2-1
OFF

BUS

110-240 Vac 346210

346050 MOD = – Optional actuator for
1 2 3
= – the control of additional
1 2 3

M
= – functions (e.g. staircase
346210
= –
N/P
= – lights, additional door locks,
T = – various activations).
For the connection and the
HOME + SECURITY BUS
configuration, please refer
to the technical sheet of the
device.

343091
= –
P
= –
= –
N
= 1
T = –
S = 9 Door lock
S

PS

„ Max. 5 internal units;

„ Max. 200 m between the entrance panel and the last internal unit with cable 336904 / 336905;
„ Max 110 m between the power supply and the last internal unit with cable 336904 / 336905;
„ A domestic Wi-Fi with internet access is needed for the connection between the CLASSE 300EOS with Netatmo connected video
internal unit and the smartphone;
„ When the call is received, only the video door entry system configured with N=1 that forwards the call to the smartphone switches on
(after appropriate configuration);
„ CLASSE 300EOS internal unit must be installed ONLY in systems made with BTicino 2 wires technology.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Example 2 - The two-family villa

TWO-FAMILY VIDEO DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM WITH SMARTPHONE CALL REPETITION

Video internal unit

Classe 300EOS with Netatmo
HOME 1

Classe 100X video internal unit

HOME 2

HOME + SECURITY DOOR ENTRY

Power supply
ENTRANCE PANEL

home
1
home
2

3.2-1
 HOME 1

344842
= – ON 230 Vac
N
= 1
= –
P HOME 2
= – ON
= –
PRI

M MASTER
= –
ON 344682
2-1 OFF = –
1- 2
N
= 2
= –
346020 P
2 1 = -
= –
M
= –

BUS

BUS

110-240 Vac
HOME + SECURITY 346050 DOOR ENTRY

CAUTION: during 2022, the DOOR ENTRY

App for Classe 100X will be replaced by the
new HOME + SECURITY App.

343081

2
1

= – S1
P Abitazione
= –
1
= –
N Abitazione PS1 Door lock
= 1 2
T = –
S = –

„ Max. 3 internal units for each dwelling;

„ Max. 200 m between the entrance panel and the last internal unit with cable 336904 / 336905;
„ Max. 1 CLASSE 300EOS with Netatmo / CLASSE100X video internal unit connected for each local LAN;
„ A domestic Wi-Fi with internet access is needed for the connection between the
CLASSE 300EOS with Netatmo / Classe 100X connected video internal unit and the smartphone.
„ In multi-family installations, the connected CLASSE 300EOS with Netatmo video internal unit must be powered locally;
„ CLASSE 300EOS with Netatmo / CLASSE 100X internal units must be installed ONLY in systems made with BTicino 2 wires
technology.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.2-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Example 3 - The apartment building

AUDIO DOOR ENTRY, VIDEO DOOR ENTRY OR MIXED MULTIFAMILY SYSTEMS

WITH SMARTPHONE CALL REPETITION

Classe 100 video internal unit

Video internal unit

Classe 300EOS with Netatmo

HOME + SECURITY
Audio Classe 100

Audio Classe 100

Entrance panel

3.3-1
 APARTMENT 18

344842
= 1 ON APARTMENT 16
N
= 8
= – 344672
P
= – ON 230 Vac = 1
= – MASTER ON N
M = 6
= –
= –
ON
PRI
P
ON = –
2-1 M = –
1- 2
MASTER

2 1
BUS

BUS

APARTMENT 2

346841
344652
= –
ON N
= 2
= –
P
= –
ON
M = –
MASTER

BUS

APARTMENT 1
344282
346841
= –
N
ON = 1
= –
P
= –
M = –
HOME + SECURITY

BUS

346841

110-240 Vac
351200 346050
=–
P
=–
=–
N
=1
352100
S =–
T =–
M =– S1
J1 = –
JMP 352100 PS

„ Max. 3 internal units for each dwelling;

„ Max. 200 m between the entrance panel and the last internal unit with cable 336904 / 336905;
„ Max. 1 CLASSE 300EOS with Netatmo / Classe 100X video internal unit connected for each local LAN;
„ A domestic Wi-Fi with internet access is needed for the connection between the CLASSE 300EOS with Netatmo / Classe 100X
connected video internal unit and the smartphone;
„ In multi-family installations, the connected CLASSE 300EOS with Netatmo video internal unit must be powered locally;
„ CLASSE 300EOS internal unit must be installed ONLY in systems made with BTicino 2 wires technology.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.3-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Example 4 - The apartment block

MULTI-FAMILY SYSTEM CONSISTING OF SEVERAL BUILDINGS, A COMMON APARTMENT BLOCK ENTRANCE

PANEL AND LONG DISTANCES

Classe 100 video internal unit

Audio Classe 100

Secondary entrance panel

System expansion interface

Common entrance
panel

3.4-1
 To the internal To the internal
units units

110-240Vac 110-240Vac
F441 346050 F441 346050

TO THE
RISER EP
346851 346851
S2
346851 346851

PS2 ON =– ON ON =3
OFF M M
ON OFF =1 ON OFF =9
MOD = 5 MOD = 5
351200
=–
P
=2
=–
N
=1
S =– 352000
T =–
M=–
110-240Vac
JMP 346851 346050
JMP 352000
346851

ON =–
M
ON

ON OFF =1
MOD = –

110-240Vac
346050

352400
=–
P
=–
=–
N
=–
S =– 351100 „ 39 risers
T =– „ for each riser, 1 EP at the bottom of the stairs and 64 IU, or 100
M=–
apartment interfaces
JMP
JMP S1 „ Main EP - last IU of the last riser 600 m
352500
„ Move to ON the microswitch of the system expansion module that
PS1 terminates the line
„ Connect max 26 IU on each node output

For correct sizing of the system, we recommend the use of the YouDiagram software
- which can be downloaded free of charge from www.bticino.com

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.4-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Example 5 - the apartment

APARTMENT WITH DEDICATED ENTRANCE PANEL AND PRIVATE CAMERAS

Classe 100 video internal unit

Interface Interface
COAX / 2 wires COAX / 2 wires
347400 347400

max 3m CAMERA 1 max 3m CAMERA 2

Apartment
interface Audio / Video node Power supply

3.5-1
 344672 ON INSIDE THE APARTMENT 5
= –
N
= 5
= – MASTER
P
= 1
= – 344672
M BUS ON
= 3
= –
N
= 2
MASTER = –
P
= 1
= –
BUS M
344672 = 3
= – OFF
N
= 4
= – MASTER
P
= 1
= – BUS 344672
M
= 3 OFF = –
N
MASTER = 1
= –
P
= 1
= –
344672 BUS M
= 3
= –
N OFF
= 3
= – MASTER
P
= 1
= –
M BUS
= 3

110-240Vac
F441 346050

346850
=–
N
=5
M=3 INT 346850

EXT

OFF
ON
343081
ON OFF

347400 = – 347400 = –
P P
S = 2 = 3
= – N = – N = –
P
= 1
PS Door lock Z = – Z = –
= –
N M = – M = –
= 1
A = – A = –
T = –
PL = – PL = –
S = 9

Camera Camera
riser for max 3 m 12 Vdc max 3 m
12 Vdc
apartment block 150 mA 150 mA

„ Max 5 video internal units, 1 apartment EP and 2 apartment cameras

„ Configure the EP and the apartment cameras starting from P=1
„ The M=3 configuration of video internal units is optional (intercom request between video internal
units).
2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.5-2
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS

Example 6 - The small house block

MULTI-FAMILY SYSTEM WITH INDEPENDENT DWELLINGS AND AT LEAST ONE COMMON ACCESS POINT

Audio / Video node Power supply

Apartment
interface

Common
Entrance Panel

3.6-1
 Inside the home - see Inside the home - see
previous diagram previous diagram
SMALL HOUSE 35 SMALL HOUSE 99

346850 346850
=3 =9 ON
N N
OFF =5 =9
INT 346850 INT 346850
M=3 M=3
EXT EXT
ON ON

ON OFF ON OFF

BUS BUS

Inside the home - see Inside the home - see

previous diagram previous diagram
SMALL HOUSE 1 SMALL HOUSE 26

346850 346850
=– =2
OFF N N
INT 346850
=1 =6 INT 346850
OFF
M=3 M=3
EXT EXT
ON ON

ON OFF ON OFF

BUS BUS

110-240Vac
F441 346050 346210
OUT1 OUT 2 O UT3 OUT 4
MOD = – Optional actuator for
= – 1 2 3
the control of additional
M
1 2 3

= – functions (e.g. staircase

= –
346210

N/P lights, additional

= –
T = – door locks, various
IN 1 I N2 IN 3 IN 4 SC S
activations).
For the connection and
the configuration, please
refer to the technical
sheet of the device.

352400
=–
P
=–
=–
N
=–
351100
S =–
T =–
M=–
JMP S
JMP 352500
PS

„ Max 99 apartment interfaces and 1 apartment block entrance panel

„ Max 50 m between Entrance Panel and audio/video node

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.6-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - AUDIO SYSTEMS

1 or more main audio EP and secondary EP

ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION
351000 SFERA basic speaker module „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with
352000 SFERA pushbutton module the system NOT POWERED. Also, every
344292 CLASSE 100A16M audio internal unit time that the configuration is changed,
344282 CLASSE 100A16E internal unit it will be necessary to disconnect the
344232 SPRINT L2 audio internal unit power supply and then reconnect it after
346040 Audio power supply approximately 1 minute.
346210 Actuator
PEP SFERA (main) entrance panel A Optional actuator for the control of
PES SFERA (secondary) entrance panel additional functions (e.g. staircase lights,
PS1-PS2-PS3 Door lock release pushbutton additional door locks, various activations).
S1-S2-S3 Electrical door lock 18V 4A impulsive For the connection and the configuration,
- 250 mA please refer to the technical sheet of the
holding current (30 Ω max) device.

B For the installation of Internal Units other

than those indicated in the diagrams,
refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS VARIANTS"
section
APARTMENT 2
(BUS) to other
Internal Units
APARTMENT 9 (BUS) to other
= – 344282
N
= 2 Internal Units
= – =– 344232
P N
= – =9
B
= – P =–
M BUS
= –
B
BUS

APARTMENT 1 APARTMENT 8

=– 344242 = –
N N 344292
=1 = 8
P =– = –
P
= –
B B = –
BUS M
= – BUS

To other Entrance Panels

(max 4 total) 351000
351000 =–
P
=2
=–
P =–
=1 N
=8
=– S3
N
=1 S2 S = – 352000
S =– 352000 T =–
T =– M=– PS3
M=– PS2 JMP PES
JMP PES
110-240 Vac

346040 346210

1 2 3

To other Entrance Panels

1 2 3

PRI PRI

(Max. 4 MEP and SEP) 346040

BUS
346210
A
PRI 110 - 240 V 50 - 60 Hz 370 mA - 225 mA
BUS 26.0 V 600 mA BUS

351000
=– BUS BUS
P
=–
=–
N S1
=1
352000
S =–
T =–
PS1
M=–
JMP PEP

3.7-1
1 or more audio Entrance Panels
ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION A Optional actuator for the control of
additional functions (e.g. staircase
351100 SFERA speaker module „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with lights, additional door locks, various
352000 SFERA pushbutton module the system NOT POWERED. Also, every
activations).
S1 Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive - time that the configuration is changed,
For the connection and the
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) it will be necessary to disconnect the
configuration, please refer to the
PEP Main entrance panel power supply and then reconnect it after
technical sheet of the device.
344292 CLASSE 100A16M audio internal unit approximately 1 minute
344282 CLASSE 100A16E internal unit B For the realisation of the Entrance
344232 SPRINT L2 audio internal unit Example of entrance panel Panel, it is possible to use SFERA
346050 Power supply configuration pushbutton panels, the universal
346210 Actuator speaker module, or digital call
P N T S
modules.
PS1 Door lock release pushbutton PE0 – – – 1 – –
PE1 – 1 – 1 – –
PE2 – 2 – 1 – –
--- – – – 1 – –
PE8 – 8 – 1 – –
N = first apartment that the EP can call
For the configuration of T, S and M, see the
technical sheets of the single devices.

APARTMENT 15 BUS
344282
= 1
N
= 5
= –
P
= –
= –
M
= –
BUS

APARTMENT 3

=– 344232
N
=3 APARTMENT 2
P =–
344292 344292
= – = –
N N
= 2 = 2
BUS P
= –
P
= –
= – = –
= – = –
M M
= – = –
APARTMENT 1

=–
344232
N
=1
P =– Max. 3 audio internal units in parallel

BUS

MAX 9 PE
351100
=– 110-240 Vac 346210
B P
=– 346050
=– 1 2 3

N
1 2 3

=1
352000 346210
A
S =–
T =–
M=– BUS
S1 JMP
352000
JMP

PS1
PEP

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.8-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - AUDIO SYSTEMS

One-family system with 1 or more audio Entrance Panels

and 5 intercommunicating Internal Units
ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION A For the realisation of the Entrance
Panel, it is possible to use SFERA,
343071 Linea 3000 audio entrance panel „ Configure and connect the Jumpers LINEA 3000 or LINEA 2000 pushbutton
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive with the system NOT POWERED.
panels.
- 250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) Also, every time that the configuration
344292 CLASSE 100A16M audio internal unit is changed, it will be necessary to B S=9 enables the simultaneous call of
346040 Power supply disconnect the power supply and then all IU
PS Door lock release pushbutton reconnect it after approximately 1
minute.
„ The intercom function is also
operational without connection of the
Example of entrance panel
Entrance panel.
configuration
P N T S
PE0 – – – 1 – 9
PE1 – 1 – 1 – 9 DEVICE 4
PE2 – 2 – 1 – 9
--- – – – 1 – 9 Intercom with IU 5 = – 344292
N
PE8 = 4
– 8 – 1 – 9 Intercom with IU 3 = –
P
Intercom with IU 2 = –
= –
M
Intercom with IU 1 = 3
DEVICE 5
BUS
344292
Intercom with IU 4 = –
N
= 5
Intercom with IU 3 = –
P
Intercom with IU 2 = –
= – DEVICE 2
M
Intercom with IU 1 = 3
BUS Intercom with IU 4 = –
N 344292
= 2
Intercom with IU 3
= –
P
DEVICE 3 Intercom with IU 5 = –
= –
Intercom with IU 1 M
344292 = 3
Intercom with IU 4 = –
N
= 3
Intercom with IU 5 BUS
= –
P
Intercom with IU 2 = –
= –
M
Intercom with IU 1 = 3
BUS

DEVICE 1
344292
Intercom with IU 4 = – 110-240 Vac
N
= 1
Intercom with IU 3 = –
P 346040
= –
Intercom with IU 2
= –
M
Intercom with IU 5 = 3
BUS
PRI PRI

BUS

346040
PRI 110 - 240 V 50 - 60 Hz 370 mA - 225 mA
BUS 26.0 V 600 mA BUS

BUS

MAX 9 PE

343071

= –
P
= –
= –
N S
= 1
T = – A
S = 9 PS
B

3.9-1
Two-family system, 1 EP and 3 IU for each apartment with
“Internal intercom and intercom among apartments” function
ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION A Optional actuator for the control of
additional functions (e.g. staircase
351100 SFERA speaker module „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with
lights, additional door locks, various
344282 CLASSE 100A16E internal unit the system NOT POWERED. Also, every
activations).
346040 Power supply time that the configuration is changed,
For the connection and the
PEP Main Entrance Panel it will be necessary to disconnect the
configuration, please refer to the
PS Door lock release pushbutton power supply and then reconnect it after
technical sheet of the device.
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive - approximately 1 minute.
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) „ The intercom function is also operational B For the installation of Internal Units
without connection of the Entrance panel. other than those indicated in the
„ The intercom between units makes diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL
it possible to call units of the same UNITS VARIANTS" section.
apartment or of other apartments.

APARTMENT 1 APARTMENT 2
Intercom inside the 344282 344282 Intercom inside the apart-
apartment = – = – ment
Intercom among apartments N N Intercom among apartments
= 1 = 2
Relay control configured = – = – Relay control configured with
with MOD=9 and P+1 P P MOD=9 and P+1
= – = –
Relay control configured = – = – Relay control configured with
M BUS BUS M
with MOD=5 and P+1 = 1 = 1 MOD=5 and P+1

344282 344282
= – = –
N N
= 1 = 2
= – = –
P P
= – = –
= – BUS BUS = –
M M
= 1 = 1

344282 344282
= – = –
N N
= 1 = 2
= – = –
P P
= – = –
= – BUS BUS = –
M M
= 1 = 1
B B

110-240 Vac

= – PEP 346040 346210

P
= –
= –
1 2 3

N
1 2 3

PRI PRI

= 1
A
BUS
346210

S = – 346040
PRI 110 - 240 V 50 - 60 Hz 370 mA - 225 mA
BUS 26.0 V 600 mA BUS

T = – 351100
M= – S
BUS BUS
JMP
JMP
PS

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.10-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - AUDIO SYSTEMS

1 or more main audio Entrance Panels

with universal speaker unit
In systems with more than 8 pushbuttons, in CAUTION A The use of the actuator is necessary if
addition to module 346991 it is necessary to the door lock opening function is required
allow for a 346992 module every 8 pushbuttons; „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with (see the actuator technical sheet).
for the connection, it will be necessary to use the system NOT POWERED. Also, every
the 2-connector multiple cable supplied with time that the configuration is changed, B For the installation of Internal Units
item 346992 itself. The following diagram it will be necessary to disconnect the other than those indicated in the
shows the internal wiring between speaker power supply and then reconnect it after diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS
module 346991, one or more 346992 expansion approximately 1 minute. VARIANTS" section.
modules, and the pushbuttons in systems with
more than 8 internal units. C The common of the pushbuttons must
Example of entrance panel configuration
be connected to the 346991 or 346992
ITEM DESCRIPTION P N T S module to which the pushbuttons
336842 Transformer PE0 – – – 1 – – themselves are connected.
344292 CLASSE 100A16M audio internal unit PE1 – 1 – 1 – –
346230 Door lock actuator PE2 – 2 – 1 – – (BUS)
346991 Universal speaker module to other
--- – – – 1 – –
346992 Pushbutton expansion Internal Units
PEP Main Entrance Panel N = first apartment that the EP can call
PS1 Door lock release pushbutton
S1 Electric door lock
APARTMENT N

344292 344292 344292

=– =– =–
N N N
=N =N =N
P =– P =– P =–
B BUS BUS BUS

(BUS)
to other Entrance
Panels (max 6) = –
C

P
= –
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

= – C
N
= 1 346991
N
C
N+1
P N S
BUS n°8

Possible systems PEP

N+7
Max. No. of call 346991
56 max 3m
pushbuttons
C
Max. No. of
6 N+8 12 Vac
expansions 18 V A
N+9 C
12V

336842
230V

8 2 1 C 336842
N +15

IN 230 Vac

OUT Power supply of existing

346992 pushbutton panel lights
346050
BUS PS1 C
S1

18V 4A

= – C
1 2 PL S+ S- P
= –
T= –
M= – N+55
8 2 1 C
A
J J
J J
P T M M M
P P
M M IN
P P
BUS
OUT
346992
346230
3.11-1
Multifamily system with 1 or more main EP and 5
intercommunicating audio internal units
ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION A Optional actuator for the control of
additional functions
351000 SFERA speaker module „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with (e.g. staircase lights, additional door
352100 SFERA pushbutton module the system NOT POWERED. Also, every locks, various activations).
344292 CLASSE 100A16M audio internal unit time that the configuration is changed, For the connection and the
346050 Power supply it will be necessary to disconnect the configuration, please refer to the
346210 Actuator power supply and then reconnect it after technical sheet of the device.
PEP Main Entrance Panel approximately 1 minute.
PS1 Door lock release pushbutton „ The intercom function is also operational B For the realisation of the Entrance
S1 Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive - without connection of the Entrance panel. Panel, it is possible to use any SFERA
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) „ The intercom among apartments can pushbutton panels (not with digital call).
be used with Classe 100A16M / Classe For further information, see the
100A16E internal units configured from “ENTRANCE PANEL VARIANTS” section.
N=1 to N=5.
Example of entrance panel configuration
C For the installation of Internal Units
P N T S other than those indicated in the
PE0 – – – 1 – – diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL
UNITS VARIANTS" section.
PE1 – 1 – 1 – –
PE2 – 2 – 1 – – (BUS) to other
--- – 1 – – Internal Units APARTMENT 11
PE8 – 8 – 1 – –
344292 C
N = first apartment that the EP can call N
= 1
= 1
= –
P
= –
= –
Intercom with IU 4 M
APARTMENT 5 = –
Intercom with IU 3 BUS
344292 C
Intercom with IU 2
= –
N
Intercom with IU 1 = 5
= –
P
= – Intercom with IU 5
= – BUS APARTMENT 4
M Intercom with IU 3
= 3
= –
Intercom with IU 2 N 344292 C
= 4
Intercom with IU 1 = –
P
Intercom with IU 4 = –
APARTMENT 3 = –
M
Intercom with IU 5 = 3
344292 C
Intercom with IU 2 = –
N BUS
= 3
Intercom with IU 1
= – Intercom with IU 4
P
= –
BUS APARTMENT 2
= – Intercom with IU 3
M
= 3
Intercom with IU 5 = – 344292 C
N
= 2
Intercom with IU 4 Intercom with IU 1 = –
P
APARTMENT 1 = –
Intercom with IU 3
= –
M
Intercom with IU 2 = 3
344292 C
Intercom with IU 5 = – BUS
N
= 1
= –
P
= –
BUS
= –
M
= 3
110-240 Vac
To other Entrance 346050 346210
Panels (max 9) 1 2 3

B
1 2 3

346210

351000 PEP A
= –
P
= – BUS
= –
N S1
352100 = 1
S = –
T = – PS1
M = –
J1 = –
2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.12-1
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - AUDIO SYSTEMS

Multifamily system with several main audio EP and call

to the guard station
Note: with this type of installation, the audio CAUTION
ITEM DESCRIPTION
is not isolated, and only one communication
at the time is possible 351000 SFERA basic speaker module „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with
352000 SFERA pushbutton module the system NOT POWERED. Also, every
344232 SPRINT L2 audio internal unit time that the configuration is changed,
346310 Guard station it will be necessary to disconnect the
A 346020 Additional power supply power supply and then reconnect it after
APARTMENT XX (BUS) 346050 Power supply approximately 1 minute.
to other PEP Main Entrance Panel
344232 Internal Units PES Secondary Entrance Panel A For the installation of Internal Units
PS1-PS2-PS3 Door lock release pushbutton other than those indicated in the
S1-S2-S3 Electrical door lock 18V 4A impulsive diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL
- 250 mA UNITS VARIANTS" section.
holding current (30 Ω max)
=–
N BUS
=–
P =9

Call to the
Guard Station
A with auxiliary 346310 Master GS = 0
APARTMENT 1 function key

344232 230 Vac

=–
N
=1
P =9 PRI

BUS 1- 2

2 1 346020
BUS

Floor call

351000 351000
=– =–
P P
=3 =2
=– =–
N N
=1 =8
S =– 352000 S2 S = – 352000 S3
T =– T =–
M=– M=–
JMP PS2 JMP PS3
PES PES

110-240 Vac

346050

PRI PRI

BUS

346040

351000
PRI 110 - 240 V 50 - 60 Hz 370 mA - 225 mA
BUS 26.0 V 600 mA BUS

=–
P
=1
BUS
=–
N
=1
352000
S =– S1
T =–
M=–
JMP PS1
352000

PEP

3.13-1
 Video system with 1 EP and star-connected riser using
non-twisted cables or pre-existing cables
ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION A Optional actuator for the control of
additional functions (e.g. staircase lights,
351200 SFERA audio/video speaker module „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with additional door locks, various activations).
352100 SFERA pushbutton module the system NOT POWERED. Also, every For the connection and the configuration,
344652 CLASSE 100V16B handsfree video time that the configuration is changed, please refer to the technical sheet of the
internal unit it will be necessary to disconnect the device.
346050 Power supply power supply and then reconnect it after
346210 Actuator approximately 1 minute. B For the realisation of the Entrance
346870 Line amplifier Panel, it is possible to use any SFERA
PEP Main Entrance Panel pushbutton panels with pushbutton call
PS Door lock release pushbutton or digital call.
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive - For further information, see the
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) “ENTRANCE PANEL VARIANTS” section.
C Move to ON the microswitch on the back
of the audio or video internal unit that
terminates the line.
D On the riser line, after item 346870 it will
be possible to install up to 18 IU max
(audio and video internal units).
APARTMENT 18
E To wire the system, use existing cables or
cables with section ≥ 0,28 mm2
ON = 1
N
= 8 F Item 346870 must only be used if the
MASTER = – distance between the EP and the last
P G
= – IU exceeds 50 m, and must be installed
M = – approximately 50 metres from the
BUS 344652 Entrance Panel
G For the installation of Internal Units
other than those indicated in the
diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS
APARTMENT 9 VARIANTS" section.

APARTMENT 2
Total max 50 m (without 346870)
Total max 100 m (with 346870)

OFF = –
N
= 9
MASTER = – ON = –
P
= –
G N
= 2
M = – MASTER = – G
max 50m

BUS P
= –
344652
BUS M = –
344652

APARTMENT 1

ON = –
N G
346841 = 1
MASTER = –
P
= –
BUS M = –
D 344652
F
E
OUT
IN
50 m

346870 max 50m

PEP 110-240 Vac 346210

351200 =– 346050
P
=–
1 2 3
1 2 3

=– 346210

N A
=1
352100 S =–
T =– S BUS

M =–
J1 = – PS
352100
JMP

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.14-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

Multifamily video system with universal speaker

module 346991 and associated separate camera
ITEM DESCRIPTION
346050 Power supply
346991 Universal speaker module
346992 Key expansion module
347400 Coax / 2 wires interface

346991 Call
pushbuttons
= –
P 110-240 Vac
= –
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 C
= – 346050
N
= 1 C
S = – N
346991 N+1
P N S n°8
The configurators in BUS
P of 346991 and of the
interface 347400 must N+7
be the same

IU BUS

8 2 1 C

IN

OUT
346992

347400 = –
P To other modules
= –
N = – 346992
Z = –
M = –
A = –
PL = –

max 3 m Camera 12 Vdc

150 mA

3.15-1
1 main video Entrance Panel
and 1 riser with floor shunt wiring
ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION A Optional actuator for the control of
additional functions (e.g. staircase lights,
351100 SFERA speaker module „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with additional door locks, various activations).
352100 SFERA pushbutton module the system NOT POWERED. Also, every For the connection and the configuration,
352400 N/D camera module time that the configuration is changed, please refer to the technical sheet of the
SFERA WIDE ANGLE it will be necessary to disconnect the device.
344652 CLASSE 100V16B handsfree video power supply and then reconnect it after
internal unit approximately 1 minute. B For the realisation of the Entrance Panel,
344282 CLASSE 100A16E handsfree audio it is possible to use any SFERA pushbutton
internal unit panels, with pushbutton call or digital call,
346050 Power supply both as main and secondary EP.
346210 Actuator For further information, see the
346841 Floor shunt “ENTRANCE PANEL VARIANTS” section.
PEP Main Entrance Panel C Move to ON the microswitch on the back
PS Door lock release pushbutton of the audio or video internal unit that
APARTMENT 15
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive terminates the line.
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) ON = 1 D For the installation of Internal Units other
N
= 5 than those indicated in the diagrams,
MASTER = –
P refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS VARIANTS"
= –
CONNECTION COMBINATIONS D section.
M = –
1 video EP, max. 2 risers on IU BUS 346050 344652
2 video EP, max. 1 riser on IU BUS 346050
BUS

APARTMENT 14

ON = 1
N
= 4
= –
346841
MASTER
P
= –
M = – D
344652

BUS

APARTMENT 1

ON = –
N
= 1
APARTMENT 2 P
= –
= –
ON = – = – D
N M
= 2 344282 = –
MASTER = – 346841
P BUS
= –
M= –
D
344652

BUS

352400 PEP 110-240 Vac 346210

=– 346050
P
=– 1
1 2
2
3
3

=–
N 346210

= 1 351100
S =–
A
S
T =– BUS
M =–
J1 = – 352100 PS
JMP
B

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.16-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

1 main video Entrance Panel and 2 risers

with floor shunt wiring
ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION A Optional actuator for the control of
additional functions (e.g. staircase
351300 SFERA WIDE ANGLE A/V module „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with lights, additional door locks, various
352500 SFERA Display Module the system NOT POWERED. Also, every activations).
344292 CLASSE 100A16M internal unit time that the configuration is changed, For the connection and the configuration,
344652 CLASSE 100V16B handsfree video it will be necessary to disconnect the please refer to the technical sheet of the
internal unit power supply and then reconnect it after device.
346050 Power supply approximately 1 minute.
346210 Actuator B For the realisation of the Entrance
3499 Line terminator Panel, it is possible to use any SFERA
CONNECTION COMBINATIONS pushbutton panels with pushbutton call
PEP Main Entrance Panel
PS Door lock release pushbutton 1 video EP, max. 2 risers on IU BUS 346050 or digital call.
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive - 2 video EP, max. 1 riser on IU BUS 346050 For further information, see the
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) “ENTRANCE PANEL VARIANTS” section.
C Move to ON the microswitch on the back
of the audio or video internal unit that
terminates the line.
D For the installation of Internal Units
other than those indicated in the
diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS
VARIANTS" section.

APARTMENT 11 APARTMENT 32
ON = 1 C ON
N = 3
= 1 N
= 2
MASTER = – = –
P P
= – = –
M = –
D 346841 344292 M
= –
344652 = –
BUS
BUS

APARTMENT 2 APARTMENT 13
ON = – ON = 1
N N
= 2 = 3
= – MASTER = –
P P
= – = –
D 344292 M
= – M = –
= –
346841 344652
BUS
BUS

APARTMENT 1 APARTMENT 12
ON = – ON = 1
N N
= 1 = 2
MASTER = – MASTER = –
P P
= – = –
D M = – M = – D
344652 344652
346841 BUS
BUS
3499

110-240 Vac
B 346050 346210
351300 PEP
=–
1 2 3
1 2 3

P
=–
A
346210

=–
N
=–
352500 TK PI SCS BUS
S =–
T =– S
M=–
JMP
PS
JMP

3.17-1
2 main video Entrance Panels and 1 riser
with in-out wiring
ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION A Optional actuator for the control of
additional functions (e.g. staircase lights,
351200 SFERA A/V module „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with additional door locks, various activations).
352100 SFERA pushbutton module the system NOT POWERED. Also, every For the connection and the configuration,
344652 CLASSE 100V16B handsfree video time that the configuration is changed, please refer to the technical sheet of the
internal unit it will be necessary to disconnect the device.
346050 Power supply power supply and then reconnect it after
346210 Actuator approximately 1 minute. B For the realisation of the Entrance
PEP1 - PEP2 Main Entrance Panel Panel, it is possible to use any SFERA
PS1 - PS2 Door lock release pushbutton pushbutton panels, with pushbutton
S1 - S2 Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive call or digital call, both as main and
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) secondary EP.
For further information, see the
APARTMENT 17
“ENTRANCE PANEL VARIANTS” section.
CONNECTION COMBINATIONS
344652 C Move to ON the microswitch on the back
1 video EP, max. 2 risers on IU BUS 346050 of the audio or video internal unit that
= 1 ON
2 video EP, max. 1 riser on IU BUS 346050 N terminates the line.
= 7
= – D For the installation of Internal Units
P SLAVE
= –
other than those indicated in the
M = –
diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS
BUS VARIANTS" section.

D E Video internal units are installed in the

apartment with MASTER-SLAVE function.
344652
Upon arrival of the call, the MASTER rings
E N
= 1 and switches on, while the SLAVE unit
= 7 OFF
only rings. If the call is answered from the
= –
P
= – SLAVE, the MASTER switches off and the
MASTER
M = – monitor of the SLAVE switches on.

BUS

APARTMENT 1
344652
= –
N
= 1 OFF
= –
P
D = –
MASTER
M = –

BUS

351200 PEP1 351200 PEP2

=– =–
P P
=– =1
=– =–
N N
=1 =1
352100 S =–
352100
S =–
T =– T =–
B M =–
B
M =–
J1 = – J1 = –
JMP 352100 JMP 352100

110-240 Vac
346050 346210
A
1 2 3
1 2 3

346210

TK PI SCS BUS
S1 S2

PS1 PS2

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.18-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

2 main video EP with additional power supply and

star-connected riser
ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION A Optional actuator for the control of
additional functions (e.g. staircase
351200 SFERA A/V module „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with lights, additional door locks, various
352000 SFERA pushbutton module the system NOT POWERED. Also, every activations).
352500 SFERA Display Module time that the configuration is changed, For the connection and the configuration,
353000 SFERA Keypad Module it will be necessary to disconnect the please refer to the technical sheet of the
344652 CLASSE 100V16B handsfree video power supply and then reconnect it after device.
internal unit approximately 1 minute.
346050 Power supply B For the installation of Internal Units
346020 Additional power supply other than those indicated in the
346210 Actuator diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS
346841 Floor shunt VARIANTS" section.
PEP1 - PEP2 Main Entrance Panel
PS1 - PS2 Door lock release pushbutton C Move to ON the microswitch on the back
S1 - S2 Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive of the audio or video internal unit that
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) APARTMENT 4 terminates the line.
ON N
= –
= 4
MASTER P
= – To other floor shunts
= – or to an audio or
B M = –
video internal unit
344652
C BUS

APARTMENT 1

ON = –
N
= 1
= –
MASTER P
= –
B M = – 346841

344652
BUS

351200 PEP2 230 Vac

=–
P 346020
=1
=– PRI

N
=1 352000
S =–
T =– S2 1- 2

M =–
JMP PS2
J2 = –
352000

(*)

351200 PEP1 230 Vac 110-240 Vac

346050 346210
=–
P 346020
=– 1
1 2
2
3
3

=–
PRI

N
A
346210

=–
S =– 352500
T =– S1 1- 2

TK PI SCS BUS
M =–
JMP PS1
J2 = –
353000
(*)

(*) Remove the configurator from the J2 socket to enable

the additional power supply to the entrance panel

3.19-1
One-family system with 1 video Entrance Panel
and 5 Internal Units in parallel and intercommunicating
ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION A Optional actuator for the control of
additional functions (e.g. staircase lights,
351300 SFERA WIDE ANGLE A/V module „ Configure the IU from N = 1 additional door locks, various activations).
344672 CLASSE 100V16E video internal unit „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with For the connection and the configuration,
346050 Power supply the system NOT POWERED. Also, every please refer to the technical sheet of the
346210 Actuator time that the configuration is changed, device.
PEP Main Entrance Panel it will be necessary to disconnect the
PS Door lock release pushbutton power supply and then reconnect it after B For the realisation of the Entrance Panel,
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive approximately 1 minute. it is possible to use SFERA, LINEA 3000
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) „ The intercom function is also operational or LINEA 2000 pushbutton panels.
without connection of the Entrance panel. For further information, see the
“ENTRANCE PANEL VARIANTS” section.
C Move to ON the microswitch of the
system audio or video internal unit that
terminates the line.
D Allow for a “9” configurator to be
connected to S on the speaker module for
making the general call.
E For the installation of Internal Units
DEVICE 3 other than those indicated in the
diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS
= – VARIANTS" section.
ON N
Intercom with IU 4 = 3
= –
MASTER P
Intercom with IU 5 = –
= – E
M
Intercom with IU 2 = 3 DEVICE 5
344672
Intercom with IU 1 = –
C ON N
BUS = 5
Intercom with IU 4 = –
P
MASTER = –
Intercom with IU 3 = – E
DEVICE 2 M
= 3
Intercom with IU 2
344672
= – Intercom with IU 1
OFF N C
Intercom with IU 4 = 2
= –
MASTER P BUS
Intercom with IU 3 = – E
= –
M
Intercom with IU 5 = 3
344672 DEVICE 4
Intercom with IU 1
BUS = –
OFF N
Intercom with IU 5 = 4
= –
MASTER P
Intercom with IU 3 = –
DEVICE 1 = – E
M
Intercom with IU 2 = 3
= –
OFF N
= 1 344672
Intercom with IU 1
Intercom with IU 4 = –
MASTER P BUS
= –
Intercom with IU 3 = – E
M
= 3
Intercom with IU 2
344672
Intercom with IU 5
BUS

110-240 Vac
PEP 346050 346210
351300
=– 1 2 3

P
1 2 3

=– 346210

=–
N
=1
TK PI SCS BUS
S =9
B D S A
T =–
M=–
JMP PS
JMP

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.20-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

Two-family system, 1 EP and 3 IU for each apartment

with “Internal intercom and among apartments” function
ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION A Move to ON the microswitch on the back
of the audio or video internal unit that
351200 SFERA A/V „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with terminates the LINE.
344672 CLASSE 100V16E video internal unit the system NOT POWERED. Also, every
346050 Power supply time that the configuration is changed, B For the installation of Internal Units
346210 Staircase light actuator it will be necessary to disconnect the other than those indicated in the
PEP Main Entrance Panel power supply and then reconnect it after diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL
PS Door lock release pushbutton approximately 1 minute. UNITS VARIANTS" section.
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive „ It is possible to install up to 3 CLASSE 100
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) video internal units per apartment with C Optional actuator for the control of
MASTER-SLAVE function. Upon arrival of additional functions (e.g. staircase
the call, the MASTER rings and switches lights, additional door locks, various
on, while the SLAVE units ring. If the call activations). For the connection and
is answered from a SLAVE, the MASTER the configuration, please refer to the
switches off and the monitor of the SLAVE technical sheet of the device.
answering the call switches on.
APARTMENT 1 APARTMENT 2

344672 344672
ON = – ON = –
N N
= 1 = 2
MASTER = – MASTER = –
P P
= – = –
= – = –
M M
= 1 = 1
BUS
Intercom inside the A BUS Intercom inside the A
apartment apartment
Intercom among Intercom among
apartments 1 and 2 apartments 1 and 2
344672 344672
= –
N = –
= 1 N
OFF OFF = 2
= –
P = –
= – P
SLAVE SLAVE = –
= –
M = –
= 1 M
= 1
BUS
BUS

344672 344672
= – = –
N N
= 1 = 2
= – = –
P P
OFF = – OFF = –
= – = –
M M
SLAVE = 1 SLAVE = 1

BUS BUS

B B

110-240 Vac
346050 346210
=– 351200 PEP
P
=–
1 2 3
1 2 3

=– 346210

N
=1 C
S =– TK PI SCS BUS
T =–
S
M =–
J1 = –
JMP PS

3.21-1
Intercom in apartment without interface 346850

ITEM DESCRIPTION APARTMENT 5

351200 SFERA A/V module
352000 SFERA pushbutton module = –
N
= 5
344292 CLASSE 100A16M internal unit = –
344672 CLASSE 100V16E video internal unit P
OFF = –
346050 Power supply = –
M
346210 Actuator = –
PEP Main Entrance Panel BUS
PS Door lock release pushbutton 344292
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max)

The apartment intercom conversation is = –

N
interrupted when a call is made from the EP OFF = 5
MASTER = –
(even if to another apartment). The system only P
= –
handles one intercom call at the time. = –
M
= –
344672
BUS

APARTMENT 3 APARTMENT 4

= – = –
N N
= 3 = 4
ON
P
= – OFF = –
= – P
= –
= – = –
M M
= – = –

344292 BUS 344292

BUS

= – = –
N N
OFF = 3 OFF = 4
MASTER = – MASTER = –
P P
= – = –
= – = –
M M
= – = –
344672 344672
BUS BUS

351200 PEP
110-240 Vac
346050 346210
Optional actuator for
the control of additional
1 2 3
1 2 3

352000 =–
P
=–
346210
functions (e.g. staircase
=– lights, additional door locks,
N various activations).
=3 TK PI SCS BUS
S =– S For the connection and the
352000 T =– configuration, please refer
M=– to the technical sheet of the
JMP PS
device.
JMP

Must be
configured with
N≥3

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.22-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

Multifamily system with 1 main video EP, 2 risers and

max. 5 intercom among apartments

ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION A Optional actuator for the control of

additional functions (e.g. staircase
351100 SFERA speaker module „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with lights, additional door locks, various
352000 SFERA pushbutton module the system NOT POWERED. Also, every activations).
352400 Camera module time that the configuration is changed, For the connection and the configuration,
SFERA WIDE ANGLE N/D it will be necessary to disconnect the please refer to the technical sheet of the
344672 CLASSE 100V16E video internal unit power supply and then reconnect it after device.
346050 Power supply approximately 1 minute.
346210 Actuator „ Calls from the entrance panels take B Move to ON the microswitch on the back
PEP Main Entrance Panel priority and stop the intercom call. of the audio or video internal unit that
PS Door lock release pushbutton terminates each apartment line.
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive
C For the installation of Internal Units
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max)
other than those indicated in the
diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS
VARIANTS" section.

BUS to other
Internal Units
APARTMENT 3

= –
Intercom with IU 4 OFF N
= 3
MASTER = –
Intercom with IU 5 P
= – C
= –
Intercom with IU 2 M
344672 = 3
APARTMENT 5
Intercom with IU 1
BUS
ON = –
Intercom with IU 4 N
= 5
MASTER = –
Intercom with IU 3 P APARTMENT 2
= –
= – C
Intercom with IU 2 M
= 3 = –
344672 N
Intercom with IU 1 Intercom with IU 4 OFF = 2
B MASTER = –
BUS Intercom with IU 3 P
= – C
= –
Intercom with IU 5 M
= 3
344672
APARTMENT 4 Intercom with IU 1
BUS
= –
Intercom with OFF N
= 4 APARTMENT 1
IU 5 MASTER = –
P
Intercom with = –
= – C = –
IU 3 M N
Intercom with = 3 OFF = 1
344672 Intercom with IU 4
MASTER = –
IU 2 P
Intercom with IU 3 = –
Intercom with BUS
= – C
IU 1 M
Intercom with IU 2 = 3
344672
Intercom with IU 5
BUS

352400 PEP
110-240 Vac
346050 346210
=–
P 1 2 3

=–
1 2 3

=– A
346210

N 351100
=1
S =– TK PI SCS BUS
T =– S
M=– 352000
JMP PS
JMP

3.23-1
Multifamily system with 2 EP
(1 with separate camera, 2 additional cameras
and riser with apartment interface)
ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION A For the installation of Internal Units
other than those indicated in the
351200 SFERA A/V module „ Configure and connect the Jumpers with diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS
351100 SFERA speaker module the system NOT POWERED. Also, every VARIANTS" section.
352100 SFERA pushbutton module time that the configuration is changed,
344652 CLASSE 100V16B handsfree video it will be necessary to disconnect the B Audio Entrance Panels associated to
internal unit power supply and then reconnect it after the cameras must belong to the SFERA,
346050 Power supply approximately 1 minute. LINEA 300 and 346991 series, and must
346850 Apartment interface be directly connected to the SCS clamps
347400 Coax / 2 wires interface of audio/video node F441.
F441 Audio/video node
PEP Main Entrance Panel C The apartment interface is connected as
PES Secondary Entrance Panel a standard video internal unit.
PS1-PS2 Door lock release pushbutton
S1 - S2 Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) To other Internal CONNECTION LIMITS
Units/Apartment 4 video EP, max. 4 lines on out of the A/V node F441
APARTMENT 2 interfaces

OFF = –
INT 346850
N
= 2
A ON
M= 3
EXT
ON OFF

C EXT
346850

APARTMENT 1
To other Internal
= – Units/Apartment
OFF N
= 1 interfaces
MASTER = –
P
= –
A M = –

344652 BUS

110-240 Vac
F441 346050

351200 PEP

audio entrance panel with

352100 associated separate camera

B
=–
PES P
351100 =3
=–
N
=1
347400 = – 347400 P = – 347400 P = – Z=–
P
= 1 = 2 = 3 M= –
N = – N = – N = – JMP
Z = – Z = – Z = – JMP
S1 M = – M = – M = –
A = – A = – A = –
=–
P PS1 PL = – PL = – PL = –
=–
=– S2
N
=1
S =– Camera
max 3 m Camera max 3 m Camera max 3 m PS2
T =– 12 Vdc
12 Vdc 12 Vdc
M =– 150 mA
150 mA 150 mA
J1 = –
JMP
2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.24-1
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

System in apartment with 2 WIRES analog interface

349410
ITEM DESCRIPTION A Connection for systems with direct CLAMPS
lock control VIDEO AUDIO
349410
349410 Analog/2 WIRES interface
351200 SFERA A/V module 1 and S+
1 1
344672 CLASSE 100V16E video internal unit (of the actuator)
F441 Audio video node 2 2 –
346050 Power supply 3 3 3
347400 Coax / 2 wires interface 4 4 4
PS Door lock release pushbutton 5 5 5
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive 6 6 A
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) 7 7 –
PEA Apartment entrance panel 8 8 –
9 – –
10 – –
11 14 14 (optional)
12 – –

From the audio

analog riser
for apartment
block

filo 6

JMP OUT configurators

2 2 WIRES BUS

2
2 WIRES BUS
From the video
analog riser for
apartment block

2
3.25-1
 CAUTION B Move to ON the microswitch on the back
of the last audio or video internal unit of
„ No analog side addressed actuations are the line or riser.
possible.
„ For wiring and system limit purposes,
interface 349410 must be considered the
same as a 2 WIRES EP.
„ Configure and connect the Jumpers with
the system NOT POWERED. Also, every time
that the configuration is changed, it will be
necessary to disconnect the power supply and
then reconnect it after approximately 1 minute.
„ In case of audio riser, the video IU activates
without displaying an image.
„ Classe 300EOS is NOT compatible with this
type of system.
PRIVATE APARTMENT

Entrance Bedroom Kitchen

ON = – ON = – ON = –
N N N
= 1 = 2 = 3
MASTER = – MASTER = – MASTER = –
P P P
= – = – = –
= – = – = –
M M M
= – = – = –
344672 344672 344672

B B B

110-240 Vac
F441 346050

PEA 351200
347400 = – 347400 = –
P P
= 2 = 3
N = – N = –
Z = – Z = –
=– M = – M = –
S P =1 A = – A = –
=– PL = – PL = –
N
PS =1
S =9
T =–
M=– max 3 m Camera max 3 m Camera
JMP 12 Vdc 12 Vdc
JMP 150 mA 150 mA

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.25-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

System in apartment with apartment interface

A For the realisation of the Entrance Panel,

ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION it is possible to use SFERA, LINEA 3000
351200 SFERA A/V module „ Configure the apartment Entrance Panels or LINEA 2000 pushbutton panels.
344672 CLASSE 100V16E video internal unit from P = 1. For further information, see the
346050 Power supply „ Configure the apartment IU from N = 1 “ENTRANCE PANEL VARIANTS” section.
346850 Apartment interface „ As for one-family systems, all internal
F441 Audio/video node units must be configured as MASTER. The B For the installation of Internal Units
other than those indicated in the
347400 Coax / 2 wires interface internal unit configured with N= 1 rings and
diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS
PEA Apartment Entrance Panel switches on, while the others ring. If the
VARIANTS" section.
PS Door lock release pushbutton call is answered from an internal unit with
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive - the monitor switched off, the monitor of the
C Move to ON the microswitch of the
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) internal unit configured with N = 1 switches internal unit that terminates the line.
off and the monitor of the internal unit
being used for answering switches on.

APARTMENT 2

ON MASTER ON MASTER ON MASTER ON MASTER

344672 344672 344672 344672

= – = – = – = –
N N N N
= 1 = 2 = 3 = 5
= – = – = – = –
P P P P
= – = – = – = –
= – = – = – = –
M M M M
= – = – = – = –
BUS BUS BUS
C C C C
MASTER
To the apartments or OFF
apartment interfaces 344672
= –
N
= 4
= –
P
= –
= –
M
= –
BUS

110-240 Vac
346850 346050
F441
IN T 346850

ON
EXT
ON OF F

OFF
= –
N
= 2
M= 3

= –
P
= 2
347400
351200 N = –
PEA
Z = –
=–
P M = –
=1
A = –
=–
2 WIRES riser N PL = –
=1
for apartment S =9 S
block A T =–
M=– PS
JMP
JMP
max 3 m Camera 12 Vdc
150 mA

3.26-1
System line expansion with interface 346851

ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION

351200 A/V module. SFERA „ After the system expansion module
346050 Power supply 346851 there are 200 m of line B available
346851 System expansion interface (interface 346851 - Furthest internal unit).
PEP Main Entrance Panel It is possible to install up to a maximum of
PS Door lock release pushbutton 3 interfaces 346850 e 346851 in cascade,
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive - only 2 of which regenerate the signal.
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max)

IU BUS
110-240 Vac
346050

200 m
Line B

346851
= –
M
= 1
346851

MOD = –

ON

ON OFF ON OFF

110-240 Vac
346050

200 m
Line A

351200 PEP
=–
P
=–
=–
N
=1
S =– S
T =–
M= –
JMP PS
JMP

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.27-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

Multifamily system with 39 risers with independent audio

ITEM DESCRIPTION
351200 SFERA A/V module
352500 SFERA Display Module
352400 Camera module SFERA WIDE ANGLE N/D
351100 SFERA speaker module
352100 SFERA 8-pushbutton module
353000 SFERA Keypad Module Riser 1
344652 CLASSE 100V16B handsfree video
internal unit APARTMENT 1
344672 CLASSE 100V16E video internal unit
346050 Power supply
= –
346850 Apartment interface N
OFF = 1
346851 System expansion interface MASTER = –
P
PEP Main Entrance Panel = 2
PEM Riser Entrance Panel M = –
PS Door lock release pushbutton BUS
344652
PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive -
A
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max)
F441 Audio video node

110-240 Vac
346851 F441 346050
= –
M
= 1
346851
MOD = 5

ON

ON OF F

ON OFF

To other EP / 2 WIRES
cameras / 347400

352400 PEM
System backbone

110-240 Vac = –
P
= 2
F441 346050 = – 351100
N
= 1
S = – S2
T = –
M = –
J1 = –
352100
JMP

To other Entrance Panels

or common Cameras

351200
=–
P
=–
=– 352500
N
=–
S =–
T =– S1
M=– The Entrance Panel must have at least one speaker
353000
JMP module, and also a display module in case of A/V.
JMP PS1 The keypad module 353000 allows release of the
door lock by entering a numerical code.
PEP

3.28-1
 Riser 2 APARTMENT 2

= –
N
= 2
346850
M = 3
IN T

ON
EXT
ON OF F

ON OFF
346850 Riser 39

APARTMENT 1 APARTMENT 1

= – = –
N N
OFF = 1 OFF = 1
MASTER = – MASTER = 7
P
= 4 A P
= 8 A
= – = –
M M
= – = –
BUS 344672 344672
BUS

110-240 Vac 110-240 Vac

346851 F441 346050 346851 F441 346050

346851 346851

ON ON

ON OFF ON OF F

=3
ON OFF ON OFF M = 9
MOD = 5
=–
M B
=2
MOD= 5
352400 PEM
352400 PEM

351100 351100
= – S3 =7 S4
P P
= 4 =8
= – =–
N PS3 352100 N PS4
= 1 =1 352100
S = – S =–
T = – T =–
M = – M =–
J1 = – J1 = –
JMP JMP

CAUTION
„ For the main Entrance Panel, riser Internal A For the installation of Internal Units
Units will have an address equal to (the riser other than those indicated in the
number x100) + no. of the Internal Unit. diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS
E.g. IU 15 of riser 9; address for the main EP VARIANTS" section.
9 x 100 + 15 = 915.
„ Configure the Internal Units from N = 1 B Move to ON the microswitch of the
„ It is possible to install up to a maximum of 3 346851 interface that terminates the line.
interfaces 346850 e 346851 in cascade, only 2
of which regenerate the signal.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.28-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

One-family system with max 16 cameras

or Entrance Panels

ITEM DESCRIPTION DEVICE 1

3499 Line terminator To other Internal Units/Apartment
344672 CLASSE 100V16E video internal unit = –
interfaces
N
F441 Audio/video node = 1
346050 Power supply OFF = –
P
= –
343081 Linea 3000 EP
M = –
347400 COAX / 2 wires interface
PEP Main Entrance Panel
PS Door lock release pushbutton (optional)
344672 To other Internal Units/Apartment interfaces
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive -
BUS
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max)

B
110-240 Vac
F441 346050

F441

= –
P 3499
= –
= –
N
= 1
T = –
S = 9

PEP 343081

= – = – = –
347400 P 347400 P 347400 P
= 1 = 2 = 3
N = – N = – N = –
Z = – Z = – Z = –
S M = – M = – M = –
A = – A = – A = –
PS PL = – PL = – PL = –

max 3 m TLC.1 max 3 m TLC.2 max 3 m TLC.3

3.29-1
 CAUTION For the realisation of the Entrance Panel,
it is possible to use all the 2 WIRES
By using the nodes in cascade, the distances
pushbutton panels.
between video source and the furthest
internal unit are halved (max 100 with cable It is possible to install all the video
336904/336905) internal units of the 2 WIRES range.

Only use one output per node and allow

for a terminator 3499 connected to the
SCS clamp

F441 F441 F441

3499 3499 3499

To other Entrance Panels or other To other Entrance Panels or other

common cameras (configured with common cameras (configured with
P= 8 – P= 11) P= 12 – P= 15)

347400 = – 347400 = – 347400 = – 347400 = –

P P P P
= 4 = 5 = 6 = 7
N = – N = – N = – N = –
Z = – Z = – Z = – Z = –
M = – M = – M = – M = –
A = – A = – A = – A = –
PL = – PL = – PL = – PL = –

max 3 m CAMERA 4 max 3 m CAMERA 5 max 3 m CAMERA 6 max 3 m CAMERA 7

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.29-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

System with module 346851 for Entrance Panel line doubling;

max. 39 independent risers and apartment interfaces
ITEM DESCRIPTION
351200 SFERA A/V module
352500 SFERA display module Riser 1 APARTMENT 1
353000 SFERA Keypad Module
352400 Camera module SFERA WIDE ANGLE N/D 344652
352100 SFERA pushbutton module = –
N
OFF = 1
351100 SFERA speaker module = –
MASTER P
344652 CLASSE 100V16B handsfree video = 2
346050 internal unit M = –
Power supply
346850 Apartment interface BUS B
346851 System expansion interface
PEP Main Entrance Panel
PS1-PS2-PS3 Door lock release pushbutton
S1-S2-S3 Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive - 110-240 Vac
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) F441 346050
PEM Riser Entrance Panel
F441 Audio video node

346851
= –
PEM
M 351200 =–
= 1 P
=2
346851

MOD = 5
=–
N
ON =–
ON OF F
352500 S =–
ON OFF T =– S2
M=–
JMP
JMP
PS2

A
110-240 Vac
346851
F441 346050
= –
M
= 1 346851

MOD = 2
ON

ON OF F

ON

A
PEP 110-240 Vac
351200 346050
=–
P
=–
=–
N
=–
352500 S1
S =–
T =–
M=– PS1
JMP
JMP 353000

Backbone

The Entrance Panel must have at least one speaker

module, and also a display module in case of A/V.

3.30-1
 CAUTION A For the realisation of the riser Entrance
Panel, it is possible to use SFERA or
„ For the main Entrance Panel, riser Internal „ Configure the riser Internal Units from N LINEA 300 pushbutton panels. For
Units will have an address equal to (the =1
further information, see the “ENTRANCE
riser number x 100) + no. of the Internal „ It is possible to install up to a maximum of PANEL VARIANTS” section.
Unit. 3 interfaces 346850 e 346851 in cascade,
E.g. IU 15 of riser 9; address for the main only 2 of which regenerate the signal. B For the installation of Internal Units
EP 9 x 100 + 15 = 915. other than those indicated in the
diagrams, refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS
VARIANTS" section.
APARTMENT 1 Riser 2

= –
N
OFF = 1
MASTER = –
P
= 4
M = –

344652 APARTMENT 2
BUS

346850
B
346850
IN T

ON
EXT
ON OF F

ON OFF
= –
EXT N
= 2
M = 3

110-240 Vac
F441 346050

A
346851
352400 PEM
= –
M =–
= 2 346851
P
MOD = 5 =4
=–
N
=1
351100
ON

ON OF F
S =–
ON OFF S3 T =–
M=–
J1 = –
PS3 352100 JMP
To other
risers

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.30-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

System with max 39 independent risers and riser

extension (100 video IU)

ITEM DESCRIPTION
351200 SFERA A/V module Riser 1
APARTMENT 51
352500 SFERA display module
353000 SFERA keypad module
= 5
352400 N/D camera module N

subdivided into 4 node outputs

OFF = 1
SFERA WIDE ANGLE = –
MASTER P
351100 SFERA speaker module = 2
352100 SFERA pushbutton module M = –
344652 CLASSE 100 V16B handsfree video

Max 50 IU
344652
internal unit
BUS B
346050 Power supply
346851 System expansion module
PEP Main Entrance Panel 110-240 Vac
PEM Riser Entrance Panel 346851 F441 346050
F441 Audio video node
= –
S1 - S2 - S3 Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive - M
= 1 346851

250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max) MOD = –

PS1-PS2-PS3 Door lock release pushbutton
ON

ON OFF

ON
subdivided into 4 node outputs

APARTMENT 1

= –
OFF N
= 1
Max 50 IU

MASTER = –
P
= 2
M = –

BUS 344652
B

110-240Vac
F441 346050

=–
P
=– 346851
=– 352400 PEM
N = –
=– M =–
= 1 P
S =– 346851
=2
MOD = 5
T =– =–
N
M=– =1
ON
351100
JMP ON OFF
S2 S =–
JMP OFF T =–
M =–
A PS2 J1 = –
PEP
351200 352100 JMP

110-240 Vac
346050
352500
Backbone

S1
353000
PS1

The Entrance Panel must have at least one

speaker module, and also a display module
in case of A/V.

3.31-1
 APARTMENT 51
subdivided into 4 node outputs

= 5
N
OFF = 1
MASTER = –
P
= 4
M = –
Max 50 IU

344652
BUS B

110-240 Vac
346851
F441 346050
= –
M
= 2 346851

MOD = –

ON

ON OFF

ON
subdivided into 4 node outputs

APARTMENT 1

= –
N
OFF = 1
Max 50 IU

MASTER = –
P
= 4
M= –

BUS 344652
B

110-240 Vac
F441 346050 CAUTION
„ For the main Entrance Panel, riser Internal
Units will have an address equal to (the riser
number x 100) + no. of the Internal Unit.
E.g. IU 15 of riser 9; address for the main EP
9 x 100 + 15 = 915.
„ Configure the riser Internal Units from N = 1
„ It is possible to install up to a maximum of 3
interfaces 346850 e 346851 in cascade, only 2
of which regenerate the signal.

= –
M A The Entrance Panel must must be created
= 2 346851
352400 PEM
MOD = 5 =– using digital call SFERA modules.
P
=4
=– B For the installation of Internal Units other
ON

N
OFF =1 than those indicated in the diagrams,
ON OFF

351100
S3 S =– refer to the "INTERNAL UNITS VARIANTS"
346851 T =–
section.
M =–
PS3 J1 = –
352100 JMP

To other
risers

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.31-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

Internal Units expansion in apartment

- (Example up to 10 IU)
Configuring the IU as indicated, this will ensure the intercom function among all units;
ITEM DESCRIPTION
when a call is received from the EP, all IU ring, and only the IU configured with N =1
351300 SFERA WIDE ANGLE A/V module switches on.
346050 Power supply For functions other than the ones specified above, contact your local technical-commercial
346841 Floor shunt representative or the BTicino technical support service.
346850 Apartment interface
344672 CLASSE 100V16E video internal unit
F441 Audio video node
S Electrical door lock 18 V 4 A impulsive -
250 mA holding current (30 Ohm max)
PEA Apartment Entrance Panel
PS Door lock release pushbutton

APARTMENT 16

B C N
= – B C
= 3
ON = – ON
= – P
N = 1
= 4 MASTER = – MASTER
= – M
P = –
= 1
= –
M
= –

344672
344672
B C

= – = –
N
= 5 N B C
= 2
= – = – ON
P P
= 1 ON = 1
= – = – MASTER
M M
= – MASTER = –

344672
B C
346841

= – 344672
N
= 1
= –
P ON
= 1
= –
110-240 Vac
M MASTER F441 346050
= –

344672

346850
346850
IN T

To other
apartments
PEA
ON
EXT

OFF ON OF F

=–
P
=1
A =–
=1 N
N =–
=6
351300 S =9
M=3
S T =–
M=–
Riser for JMP
apartment PS JMP
block

3.32-1
 CAUTION A For the realisation of the Entrance Panel,
it is possible to use SFERA, LINEA 3000 or
„ Configure the apartment Entrance LINEA 2000 pushbutton panels. For further
Panels from P = 1 information, see the “ENTRANCE PANEL
„ All the IU must be MASTER. VARIANTS” section.

B For the installation of Internal Units other than

those indicated in the diagrams, refer to the
"INTERNAL UNITS VARIANTS" section.

C Move to ON the microswitch on the back of the

internal unit that terminates the line.
B C
ON
= –
N
= 9 MASTER
= –
P
= 1
= –
M
= –

344672
B C N
= –
B C
= 7
= –
P
= 1 = 1
N
= 0 = –
M
= – = – ON
P
= 1 ON
= – 346841 MASTER
M
= – MASTER

344672 344672
B C N
= –
= 6
= – B C
= – P
N = 1
= 8 = –
= – M
P = –
= 1 ON
ON
= –
M
= – MASTER
MASTER

344672
344672

110-240 Vac
F441 346050
= –
M
= 1 346851

MOD = –
ON

ON OF F

ON

346851

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.32-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS

System with 1 guard station and independent risers

ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION

346310 Guard station – An additional power supply with 346020 is
346020 Additional power supply recommended
F441 Audio video node – Use the YouDiagram software for the
346050 Power supply functional check and calculation of the
current absorptions – free download from:
www.professionisti.bticino.it
– Refer to the documentation supplied with the
Guard station for its configuration.

Riser 1 Riser 2 Riser 3

346851 346851 346851

346851 346851 346851

= – = – = –
M M M
ON ON ON

ON OF F = 1 ON OFF = 2 ON OFF = 3
ON OFF MOD = 5 ON OFF MOD = 5 ON OFF MOD = 5

To other interfaces 346851

BUS 346310 Master GS = 0

230 Vac
110-240 Vac
F441 346050 346020
PRI

1- 2

2 1

Main EP
(P = 1)

3.33-1
System with several guard stations
and independent risers

ITEM DESCRIPTION CAUTION

346310 Guard station – An additional power supply with 346020 is recommended
346020 Additional power supply
F441 Audio video node – Max. 3 GS which can be star connected with audio video node. Up to a max. of 16 GS can be
346050 Power supply connected in IN/OUT connection or with floor shunt 346841.
– Refer to the documentation supplied with the Guard station for its configuration

Riser 1 Riser 2

110-240 Vac 110-240 Vac

346851 F441 346050 346851 F441 346050

346851 346851

ON ON

ON OF F ON OFF

ON OFF ON OFF

= – = –
M M
= 1 = 2
MOD = 5 MOD = 5

Riser EP Riser EP
To other interfaces 346851

346310 Master GS = 0

230 Vac

346020
PRI

1- 2

2 1
BUS

110-240 Vac
F441 346050 346310 Secondary GS = 1

230 Vac

346020
PRI

1- 2

BUS 2 1

Main EP
P=1

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.34-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

Hierarchical system with 1 backbone GS and 1 GS for

each independent riser
ITEM DESCRIPTION
346310 Guard station
346020 Additional power supply
F441 Audio video node
346851 System expansion interface
346050 Power supply

346310 Riser GS = 1 230 Vac 346310 Riser GS = 2 230 Vac

346020 346020
PRI PRI

1- 2 1- 2

BUS 2 1 BUS 2 1

To the riser IU 1 To the riser IU 2

110-240 Vac 110-240 Vac

346851 F441 346050 346851 F441 346050

346851 346851

ON ON

ON OF F ON OFF

ON OFF ON OFF

= – = –
M M
= 1 = 2
MOD = 5 MOD = 5

Riser EP Riser EP

110-240 Vac
346050 Backbone
346310 GS = 0 230 Vac

346020
PRI

F441 1- 2

BUS 2 1

Main EP
(P = 1)

3.35-1
 CAUTION

– An additional power supply with 346020 is recommended

– Refer to the documentation supplied with the product for the Guard station configuration
and its operation
– The backbone GS do not manage the riser EP video signal
– A maximum of 16 GS can be installed

346310 Riser GS = 15 230 Vac

346020
PRI

1- 2

BUS 2 1

To the riser IU 15

110-240 Vac
346851 F441 346050

346851

ON

ON OF F

ON OFF

= 1
M
= 5
MOD = 5

Riser EP

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.35-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

Hierarchical system with backbone GS, riser GS and

Slave GS on the backbone and on the riser
CAUTION
ITEM DESCRIPTION
346310 Guard station – An additional power supply with 346020 is recommended
346020 Additional power supply – Refer to the documentation supplied with the product for the Guard station
F441 Audio video node configuration and its operation
346851 System expansion interface
346050 Power supply – The backbone GS do not manage the riser EP video signal
– A maximum of 16 GS can be installed
– Use the YouDiagram software for the functional check and calculation of the
current absorptions – free download from: www.professionisti.bticino.it
– The slave GS follow the day/night settings of the associated GS

346310 Riser GS = 1 230 Vac 346310 Slave GS = 9 230 Vac 346310 Riser GS = 2 230 Vac 346310 Slave GS = 10 230 Vac

PRI PRI PRI PRI

1- 2 1- 2 1- 2 1- 2

BUS 2 1
346020 BUS 2 1
346020 BUS 2 1
346020 BUS 2 1
346020

To the riser To the riser

IU 1 IU 2

110-240 Vac 110-240 Vac

346851 F441 346050 346851 F441 346050

346851 346851

ON ON

ON OF F ON OFF

ON OFF ON OFF

= – = –
M M
= 1 = 2
MOD = 5 MOD = 5

Riser EP Riser EP

110-240 Vac 346310 Backbone GS = 0 230 Vac

F441 346050
346020
PRI

1- 2

BUS 2 1

Main EP
(P = 1)

3.36-1
 346310 Riser GS = 7 230 Vac 346310 Slave GS = 15 230 Vac

PRI PRI

1- 2 1- 2

BUS 2 1 346020 BUS 2 1 346020

To the riser IU 7

110-240 Vac
346851 F441 346050

346851

ON

ON OFF

ON OFF

= –
M
= 7
MOD = 5

Riser EP

346310 Slave GS = 8 230 Vac

PRI

1- 2

BUS 2 1 346020

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.36-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

2 wire/IP mixed system with guard station software

ITEM DESCRIPTION ITEM DESCRIPTION

346851 System expansion module
B
351200 SFERA A/V module
352500 SFERA Display Module 346850 Apartment interface 344672
353000 SFERA Keypad Module F441 Audio video node ON = –
N
344672 CLASSE 100 V16E video internal unit 346841 Floor shunt = 1
346300 Guard station software 347400 Coax -2 WIRES interface MASTER = –
P
346891 = –
346050 Power supply 2 WIRES – IP interface
= –
346020 Additional power supply 3499 Line terminators M
= –

To the IU BUS
(9-10)
110-240 Vac Internal
346851 346050 units 11– 25
Riser Riser
IN 346851

OUT
ON

ON OFF

= –
M F441
= 1
MOD = –

346841 346841

3499

Riser (internal units

1 - 10)

Software
Guard station (346300)

LAN

„ Configuration using the

SwitchBoardConfigurator software
„ The LAN network must be dedicated to
the IP video door entry service

3.37-1
 Internal APARTMENT 26 344672
units 27
– 45 ON = –
N
= 1
Riser MASTER = –
P
= –
= –
110-240 Vac M
= –
346850 346050
= 2
N
= 6 INT 346850
M = 3
EXT
ON
BUS
ON OFF

C A 230 Vac 110-240 Vac A Device also configurable using MyHomeSuite,

= – 346891 346020 346050 which can be downloaded from:
M1
= – www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com
= –
N1
PRI

= 1
B For better image quality, it is recommended to
= – use video internal units with display size <7 ".
M2
SPEED

= –
346891
LINK POWER

= 4 1- 2

Caution: the interface is NOT compatible with

N2
= 5
C Classe 300EOS and HOMETOUCH internal
SCS SCS SCS
ETH AV IN AV AV OUT DC

C = 1
units. ONLY use in systems with Classe 100
internal units.

F441

LAN

3499

BUS BUS 347400

351200 351200 = –
=– =– P
P P = 3
=1 =2 N = –
=– =– Z = –
N N
=– =– M = –
352500 S =– 352500 S =– A = –
T =– T =– PL = –
M=– M=–
JMP JMP
JMP JMP
353000 353000
max 3 m Tlc 12 Vdc
150 mA

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.37-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VIDEO SYSTEMS

Residential complex with 2 wire/IP mixed system

ITEM DESCRIPTION ITEM DESCRIPTION

351200 SFERA A/V module 346020 Additional power supply
352500 SFERA Display Module 346851 System expansion interface
353000 SFERA Keypad Module 346300 Guard station software
346050 Power supply 346891 2 WIRES – IP interface
PEP Main Entrance Panel
PEM Riser Entrance Panel

APARTMENT BLOCK 1

Riser 1
(internal units 101 – 199) B A 230 Vac 110-240 Vac
= –
M1 346891 346050
= 1
= –
N1
= 1 PRI

= –
M2
= 1
346851
SPEED

346891

= 9
LINK POWER

= – N2
M = 9 1- 2

= 1 INT 346850 C = 1 ETH SCS SCS SCS

DC

MOD = 5
AV IN AV AV OUT

346020
EXT
ON

ON OFF
ON OFF

PEM
351200 =–
BUS P
=2
=–
N SWITCH HUB
=–
352500 S =–
T =–
M=–
JMP
JMP
353000

LAN

LAN

B A 230 Vac 110-240 Vac

346891 346050
= –
M1
= OFF
= –
PRI

N1
= –
= –
SPEED

M2 346891
LINK POWER

= –
= –
1- 2

N2
= – ETH SCS
AV IN
SCS
AV
SCS
AV OUT DC

C = 1 346020

PEP
351200
=– BUS
P
=1
=–
N
=–
352500
S =–
T =–
M=–
JMP
JMP 353000

3.38-1
 APARTMENT BLOCK 2

Riser 2 Riser 3
(internal units 200 – 299) (internal units 300 – 350)

346851 346851
= – = –
M M
= 2 = 3
INT 346850 INT 346850
MOD = 5 MOD = 5

EXT EXT
ON ON

ON OFF
ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

A Device also configurable using

MyHomeSuite, which can be B A 230 Vac 110-240 Vac
downloaded from:
346891 346050
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com
= –
B M1
= 2
Caution: the interface is NOT
PRI

= –
compatible with Classe 300EOS and N1
= – SPEED

HOMETOUCH internal units. ONLY use = – 346891

LINK POWER

M2
in systems with Classe 100 internal = 3 1- 2

units. = 5
N2 SCS SCS SCS

= 0
ETH AV IN AV AV OUT DC

346020
C = 1
PEM
351200
=– BUS
P
=3
=–
N
=–
352500
S =–
T =–
M=–
JMP
JMP 353000

LAN

Guard station (346300) software

„ Configuration using the

SwitchBoardConfigurator software
„ The LAN network must be dedicated to
the IP video door entry service

LAN

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.38-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
BUS BUS BUS

230
 WIRING DIAGRAMS VARIANTS
230 Vac 230 Vac
BUS PI
PRI PRI

110-240 Vac
346020 346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~ PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA 175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz 47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA 600 mA

1 2 1 2
ON ON ON
S1

2-1 2-1

MASTER
BUS TKSLAVE SLAVE
BUS BUS BUS

Vac S2
3.1
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VARIANTS

SFERA entrance panels

Thanks to their flexibility, SFERA entrance panel offer countless installation combination. As it is impossible to present all
such possible combination, below are some simple rules that must be complied with for the combination of the electronic
modules.

For the composition of the entrance panel, always start from the speaker module and/or the audio/video module:

Basic speaker
module 351000
To the BASIC speaker module 351000 it is ONLY possible to connect pushbutton modules
352000/352100 either in all pushbuttons on single column, or all pushbuttons on
double column mode – a mixed solution is NOT permitted.

Pushbutton 352000 Teleloop

module 352100 module 352700

To the speaker modules 351100, 351200 and 351300, it is possible to connect

Speaker (through dedicated connection) the Teleloop Module and control voice
module 351100
synthesis 352700. To the audio module 351100 it is possible to connect an
N/D and wide angle lens camera module 352400.
Camera
module 352400 (Caution: 352700 e 352400 max. 1 for entrance panel).

A/V 351200
module 351300

1
Display
module 352500
All the other electronic modules must be connected following this
connection order:
1. Display module 352500 (ONLY 1 for entrance panel)
2. Door lock release modules (keypad 353000 and key card reader 353200)
- always after the keypad module (if present).
2 3. Pushbutton modules 352000/352100

Keypad module
NOTES:
353000
Key card reader - The use of the display module 352500 prevents the installation of pushbutton modules
module
352000/352100 and vice versa.
353200
- Plate module 352200 may be installed without particular limitations (with the exception
of the reaching of the system absorption limits), in combination with display module
3 352500 and/or door lock release modules.
- Door lock release modules: keypad 353000 and badge reader 353200, must ONLY be 1
Pushbutton of each type on the same pushbutton panel, if connected using flat cable.
module
- Door lock release modules: keypad 353000 and badge reader 353200, may be used
352000
352100 individually and/or simultaneously in STAND ALONE installations.

3.1.1-1
Wiring diagrams variants of Entrance Panels/Cameras

SFERA ENTRANCE PANELS IN AUDIO SYSTEMS

Installation in audio systems with power supply 346040

Basic
speaker module 351000 110-240 Vac
Power supply 346040

PRI PRI

BUS

346040
PRI 110 - 240 V 50 - 60 Hz 370 mA - 225 mA
BUS 26.0 V 600 mA BUS

SCS

BUS

BUS

Pushbutton 352000
module 352100

NOTE: it is possible to install other pushbutton modules 352000/352100 complying with the installation rules for SFERA Entrance Panels.

Installation in audio systems with power supply 346050

Speaker
module 351100
BUS
110-240 Vac
Power supply 346050

Pushbutton 352000
module 352100
BUS

NOTE: it is possible to install other pushbutton modules 352000/352100 complying with the installation rules for SFERA Entrance Panels.

Speaker
module 351100
BUS
110-240 Vac
Power supply 346050

Display 352500
module

BUS

NOTE: The residents' address book of Display module 352500 can be inserted manually, or using a PC and the TiSferaDesign software,
and then uploaded to the module using an USB interface (recommended).
2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1.2-1
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VARIANTS

Wiring diagrams variants of Entrance Panels/Cameras

SFERA ENTRANCE PANELS IN VIDEO SYSTEMS

Audio/video 351200 351200

module 351300 A/V module 351300

J1=JMP
J2= –

Remove J2 to enable
additional power supply
BUS PI

BUS PI
Pushbutton 352000 110-240 Vac 110-240 Vac
230 Vac
module 352100 Power supply Power supply
Additional power
supply
PRI

346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

346050 346050 346020

BUS TK BUS TK

NOTE: In systems with several Internal Units, it will be necessary

to allow for an extra power supply to be connected to the speaker
module of the Entrance Panel. In order to connect the additional
power supply unit, it will be necessary to remove configurator J2
from the speaker module.

Camera Teleloop
module 352400 module 352700

Speaker BUS PI NOTE: Check the

module current absorption. If
351100 necessary, power the
device locally
BUS PI

110-240 Vac A/V

Power supply module 110-240 Vac
351200 Power supply
351300

Display 352500
module

346050
346050
BUS TK
BUS TK

NOTE: The residents' address book of Display module 352500 NOTE:Teleloop module 352700 may be connected
can be inserted manually in the device, or using a PC and the directly to speaker module 351100 and to A/V
TiSferaDesign software, and then uploaded to the module modules 351200/351300.
using an USB interface (recommended).

3.1.2-2
SFERA ENTRANCE PANELS IN AUDIO AND VIDEO SYSTEMS

Connection to the key expansion module 346993

Wiring with separate commons Wiring with unique common

SFERA speaker modules 351000 SFERA speaker modules 351000

351100 351100
=– 351200 =– 351200
P 351300 P 351300
=– =–
=– =–
N N
=1 =1
S =– S =–
T =– T =–
M =– M =–
J1 = – J1 = –
JMP JMP

Note: Note:
Remove configurator J1 Remove configurator J1

No. 1 No. 1

346993 346993

P96 P95 P94 P93 P92 P91 P90 P89 P96 P95 P94 P93 P92 P91 P90 P89

max 2m max 2m

No. 2 No. 2
max 1.5m max 1.5m

346993 346993

P88 P87 P86 P85 P84 P83 P82 P81 P88 P87 P86 P85 P84 P83 P82 P81

No. 12 No. 12

346993 346993

P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1 P8 P7 P6 P5 P4 P3 P2 P1

Each module 346993 can manage up to 8 call keys It is possible to connect several modules 346993 (Max. 96 call keys for each Entrance Panel).

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1.2-3

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VARIANTS

Wiring diagrams variants of Entrance Panels/Cameras

LINEA 300 ENTRANCE PANELS IN VIDEO SYSTEMS

Systems with LINEA 300 pushbutton panel

EP speaker module

BUS PI
USB

J2
J1
P
N
TS
USB
J2
J1
P
N
TS

2 1 BUS PL S+ S−

2 1 BUS PL S+ S− BUS PL S+ S-

110-240 Vac
Power supply

Video pushbutton panels

308001 – 308011
308002 – 308012 346050
308003 – 308013
308004 – 308014 BUS TK

Systems with LINEA 300 pushbutton panel and additional power supply

EP speaker module

J1 J2
Remove J1
USB
J2
J1
P
N
TS

2 1 BUS PL S+ S−

BUS PL S+ S-

BUS PI
2 1
110-240 Vac 230 Vac
Power supply
346020
PRI

346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA

Additional power
Video pushbutton panels supply
308005 – 308015
346050
BUS TK

NOTE: in systems with several Internal Units, it will be necessary to allow for an extra
power supply to be connected to the speaker module of the Entrance Panel. Before
connecting the additional power supply, it will be necessary to remove jumper J1 from
the speaker module.

3.1.2-4
LINEA 2000 ENTRANCE PANEL

LINEA 2000 Entrance Panels for installation in audio system (up to 4 calls)
110-240 Vac BUS
342911 346040
342921
342931
342941
PRI PRI

BUS

P N TS
346040
PRI 110 - 240 V 50 - 60 Hz 370 mA - 225 mA
BUS 26.0 V 600 mA BUS

SCS

Power supply
BUS

LINEA 2000 Entrance Panels for installation in video one and two family systems
BUS PI
343001 110-240 Vac
343002 346050

BUS PL S+ S-
P N TS

Power supply

NOTE: the LINEA 2000 Entrance Panels cannot

BUS TK
be powered locally.

LINEA 3000 ENTRANCE PANEL

LINEA 3000 Entrance Panels for installation in audio one and two family systems
343071 110-240 Vac BUS
346040

PRI PRI

BUS

346040
PRI 110 - 240 V 50 - 60 Hz 370 mA - 225 mA
BUS 26.0 V 600 mA BUS

SCS

Power supply
BUS

LINEA 3000 Entrance Panels for installation in video one and two family systems

343081 BUS PI
343091 110-240 Vac
343093 346050

Power supply

NOTE: the LINEA 3000 Entrance Panels cannot

BUS TK
be powered locally.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1.2-5

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VARIANTS

Wiring diagrams variants of Entrance Panels/Cameras

COAXIAL/2 WIRES INTERFACE MODULE 347400

In the connection diagrams, in alternative to SFERA video Entrance Panels, it is also possible to use the coaxial 2
WIRES interface for 12 Vdc cameras, with the corresponding camera. The camera may be connected to the system and
associated to the speaker module (separate), or as independent camera. In the system, the coaxial/2 WIRES interface
(347400) is considered as a video Entrance Panel.

Separate camera with in-out wiring to the SFERA speaker module 351100
(*) Interface 347400 (used for the connection of the separate camera), and the corresponding speaker module, must be configured with the
same value in P.
BUS PI

110-240 Vac
346050 (*) =– Speaker
P module
=–
N
=– 351100 Coaxial/2 WIRES
=– (*) P
= –
interface
S =– = –
T =– N = –
M=– Z = –
JMP M = –
347400
Power JMP A = –
* With in-out
supply BUS 2 1 PL S+ S- PL = –
camera wiring,
the interface must
be the device
max 3 m Tlc 12 Vdc terminating the
150 mA line

NOTE: the Entrance Panel created in this way (speaker module 351100 and separate camera), must be considered as a video Entrance Panel,
both for the number of risers that can be connected and the number of Internal Units

Video Entrance Panel and audio Entrance Panel with separate coaxial camera

110-240 Vac BUS PI Camera

module
Power supply
352400

=–
P
=–
Speaker
module
=–
N
=1
351100
TK PI SCS
346050 S =–
T =–
BUS TK M=–
JMP BUS 2 1 PL S+ S-
JMP

BUS TK

= – Coaxial/2 WIRES
P interface
= 1
N = – 347400 Speaker =–
module P
Z = – =1
M = – 351100 =–
N
A = – =1
PL = – S =–
T =–
M=–
BUS 2 1 PL S+ S- JMP
Tlc 12 Vdc JMP
max 3 m
150 mA

NOTE: the camera must be considered as a video Entrance Panel, both for the number of risers that can be connected and the number of
Internal Units.

3.1.2-6
ACTIVATION OF A LOAD UPON SWITCHING ON OF A CAMERA

Operating mode of the camera upon

switching on of systems integrated with
Home automation. Every time that the
camera switches on (call, auto-switching
on, alarm), the home-automation actuator
and the scenario configured in A and PL are
activated. When the camera switches off, the
Internal Units associated actuator also switches off, while
the scenario remains active.
If an actuator used by the automation
system is also associated to the camera,
the actuator switches off when the camera
is switched off, even if when the camera
110-240Vac was switched on it was already on. To avoid
F441 346050 this, to activate the load use an F411U2,
configuring different PLs and connecting the
contacts in parallel.

347400 = – 347400 = –
P P
= 1 = 2
N = – N = –
Z = – Z = –
M = – M = –
A = 2 A = 1
PL = 1 PL = 1

max 3 m Tlc 12 Vdc max 3 m Tlc 12 Vdc OUT

150 mA 150 mA F422 I1 = –
OUT
I2 = –
I3 = –
L1 L2
ART.F422

L I4 = 1
230 Vac MOD = –
N

IN

A =1 F411U1 A =2 F411U1 E46ADCN (*)

PL = 1 PL = 1
1 2 3 1 2 3

F411/1N F411/1N

NL
230V

230 45VA
C1 C1

230V a.c .

AUTOMATION
SYSTEM
MYHOME

CAUTION (*): during 2022 the E46ADCN power supply will be replaced by the new E56 power supply.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1.2-7

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VARIANTS

Internal Unit Variants - Single family or multifamily

systems with apartment interface 346850
EXAMPLE - 4 VIDEO INTERNAL UNITS WITH SIMULTANEOUS SWITCHING ON

CAUTION

To install video internal units with simultaneous switching on, it will be

necessary to allow for an output of the floor shunt for each IU

230 Vac 2-1 ON MASTER 230 Vac 2-1 ON MASTER 230 Vac 2-1 ON MASTER
= – = – = –
N N N
= 4 = 3 = 2
= – = – = –
PRI PRI PRI

P P P
346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
= – 346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
= – 346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz
= –
= – = – = –
SCS: 27 Vdc SCS: 27 Vdc SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA 600 mA 600 mA

M M M
= – = – = –

344672 344672 344672

346020 346020 346020
2 1 BUS 2 1 BUS 2 1 BUS

344672
= –
N
ON = 1
= –
P
MASTER = –
It is possible to have the INTERCOM function = –
among the 4 devices (if properly configured). M
= –

BUS
346841

IU BUS
(to the 346050 or F441)

ESEMPIO - VIDEO INTERNAL UNIT TABLETOP INSTALLATION

CAUTION

A In order to install a tabletop video internal unit,

it will be necessary to use the audio/video node
(F441) or the 346841 floor shunt, dedicating an
ON
output to the installation itself.
ON 344652 = – MASTER
N
MASTER = 2 336982
= –
P
A = –
= – M = –
N
= 1
= –
P BUS 336803
= – 344652 5 - BROWN
M = – 12
34

A 6 - BROWN - WHITE
1 2 3 4

8 7 6 5

110-240 Vac
F441 346050

OUT2

Video sources
3.1.3-1
Internal Unit Variants - Multifamily systems
without apartment interface 346850
CAUTION

In the same apartment on the same call, it is possible to install up to 3 devices maximum
(audio and video internal units or ringtones).

EXAMPLE - TWO AUDIO INTERNAL UNITS IN ADDITION TO THE BASIC AUDIO INTERNAL UNIT
APARTMENT 2
BUS
audio = – = – = –
N N N
= 2 OFF = 2 OFF = 2 OFF
= – = – = –
P P P
= – = – = –
= – = – = –
M M M
= – = – = –

BUS 344282 BUS 344282 BUS 344282

BUS
audio Basic audio Audio internal unit in Last audio internal unit
internal unit parallel in parallel

EXAMPLE - ONE AUDIO INTERNAL UNIT AND ONE RINGTONE, IN ADDITION TO THE BASIC VIDEO INTERNAL UNIT

APARTMENT 11

= 1 = 1
N OFF N ON
= 1 = 1
= – MASTER = –
P P
= – –
= – = – 1 1
M M
= – = –
5M 5M
344672 344292 336910
BUS

Basic video Audio internal Additional ringtone

internal unit unit in parallel (analog)
BUS
from floor shunt (346841) or audio/video node (F441)

EXAMPLE - TWO AUDIO INTERNAL UNITS IN ADDITION TO THE BASIC VIDEO INTERNAL UNIT
APARTMENT 3

= – = – ON
N N = –
= 3 OFF = 3 OFF N
= – = – = 3
P MASTER P = –
= – – P
= – = – –
M M = –
= – = – M
= –
344652 344282 344282
BUS BUS

Basic video 1st audio internal Last audio internal

internal unit unit in parallel unit in parallel
BUS
from floor shunt (346841) or audio/video node (F441)
2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1.4-1
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VARIANTS

Internal Unit Variants - Multifamily systems

without apartment interface 346850
EXAMPLE - TWO VIDEO INTERNAL UNITS IN ADDITION TO THE BASIC VIDEO INTERNAL UNIT
The variant is NOT possible with IU without MASTER/SLAVE function
- This variant DOES NOT allow the simultaneous switching on of the video internal units
- The variant is NOT possible with C300EOS and Hometouch internal units.

APARTMENT 1

MASTER SLAVE SLAVE

ON
= – OFF N = – OFF = –
N N
= 1 MASTER = 1 = 1
= – P = – SLAVE = – SLAVE
P P
= – = – = –
M = – M = – M = –

344652 344652 344652

BUS BUS

Basic video First video internal unit in Last video internal unit in
internal unit parallel parallel

IU BUS
from floor shunt (346841) or audio/video node (F441)

APARTMENT 4 IU BUS

MASTER SLAVE SLAVE

= – = – = –
N N N
= 4 OFF = 4 OFF = 4 OFF
= – = – = –
P MASTER P P
= – = – = –
= – = –
SLAVE = –
SLAVE
M M M
= – = – = –

344672 BUS 344672 BUS 344672

Basic video First video internal unit in Last video internal unit in
IU BUS internal unit parallel parallel

3.1.5-1
 EXAMPLE - THREE VIDEO INTERNAL UNITS IN SIMULTANEOUS SWITCHING ON

APARTMENT 11

230 Vac 230 Vac

To install video internal units with
simultaneous switching on inside the
apartment, it will be necessary to dedicate PRI PRI

an output of the floor shunt to each

apartment IU.
346020 346020
PRI: 220 – 240 V~ PRI: 220 – 240 V~
175 – 165 mA 175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz 47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA 600 mA

346020 346020
1 2 1 2

= 1 ON = 1 ON = 1 ON
N N N
= 1 = 1 = 1
= – = – = –
P P P
= – = – = –
= – = – 2-1 = – 2-1
BUS M M M
= – = – = –
IU MASTER
SLAVE SLAVE
344672 BUS 34672 BUS 344672 BUS
346841

IU BUS

EXAMPLE - ONE AUDIO INTERNAL UNIT AND ONE ADDITIONAL RINGTONE IN ADDITION TO THE BASIC VIDEO INTERNAL UNIT

APARTMENT 15

346210 1 2 3
= 1 = 1
1 2 3

N N MOD = SLA
1 2 3

= 5 = 5
OFF OFF 346210
M
= –
= – = –
P MASTER P = –
= – – = 1
M = – = – N/P
M = 5
= –
3499* BUS T = 2

344652 344282

BUS BUS

Basic video internal unit Audio internal unit in parallel

IU BUS 89. xx
90. xx
from floor shunt (346841)
230Vac 91. xx
or audio/video node (F441)
Call repeater on Additional
ringtone (Bell type)
NOTE (*): If the actuator is installed as the last line or riser device,
allow for a line terminator 3499

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1.5-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VARIANTS

Wiring diagrams variants for DIN rail devices

AUDIO / VIDEO NODE F441

By using the audio/video node, it is possible to connect up to 4 video entrance panels / cameras (or 4 audio/video nodes
in cascade) and up to 4 two WIRES video risers.

To other A/V nodes F441 / Interfaces

110-240 Vac
F441 Audio/video
node 346050

To other A/V nodes

F441 / Interfaces
346851

MULTI-CHANNEL MATRIX F441M

In alternative to the audio/video node F441, it is also possible to use the multichannel matrix F441M. The matrix makes
it possible to connect (on the input) up to 4 Entrance Panels. Up to 8 risers can be generated on the output.

Internal Unit risers

110-240 Vac
F441M 346050
OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 OUT 7 OUT 8

TK1 TK2 TK3 TK4 S1 S2 S3 S4 BUS

Entrance Panels

CAUTION: the multichannel matrix is NOT compatible with Classe 300EOS and Hometouch internal units.

3.1.6-1
INTERCOM IN APARTMENT WITH 2 DIN COMPACT POWER SUPPLY 346030

In order to have the apartment intercom function whilst saving DIN modules, it is possible to use, as an alternative to
the power supply 346050, compact power supply 346030 wired as follows:

APARTMENT 2

344672 344672 344672 344672

ON ON ON ON

MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER

= – = – = – = –
N N N N
= 1 = 2 = 3 = 4
= – = – = – = –
BUS P BUS P BUS P BUS P
= – = – = – = –
= – = – = – = –
M M M M
= 3 = 3 = 3 = 3

To the apartments
or apartment
interfaces

230 Vac (50 –60 HZ)

346850

346850
346030
INT

344672 ON PR I
ON
EXT
ON OF F
346841 MASTER 346030

OFF PRI: 220 - 240V ~

185-175m A
50/60 Hz

SCS A- V 27Vd c

= – = –
SCS 600m A

N N
= 2 = 5
M = 3 BUS = – SCS A-V SCS
P
= –
= –
M
= 3

2 WIRES riser for

apartment block NOTE: max. 5 IU for apartment.

CAUTION
„ Configure the apartment Entrance Panels
from P = 1.
„ Configure the apartment IU from N = 1
„ As for one-family systems, all internal
units must be configured as MASTER. The
internal unit configured with N= 1 rings and
switches on, while the others ring. If the
call is answered from an internal unit with
the monitor switched off, the monitor of the
internal unit configured with N = 1 switches
off and the monitor of the internal unit
being used for answering switches on.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1.6-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VARIANTS

Wiring diagrams variants for DIN rail devices

8/2 WIRES INTERFACE 346150

The diagrams only show one 2 WIRES riser Entrance Panel: with these variants, it is possible to install one video EP
and up to 2 audio EP.

CAUTION: the 8/2 wires interface is NOT compatible with Classe 300EOS internal units.

CAUTION
* When connecting wires 1 and 2, strictly
comply with the numbering, in order to
avoid possible malfunctioning.

2 WIRES 2 WIRES audio EP

2 WIRES
video EP IU BUS 2 WIRES audio EP video EP IU BUS Audio EP 1 Audio EP 2
BUS PL S+ S- BUS PL S+ S- BUS PL S+ S- BUS PL S+ S- BUS PL S+ S-

PS 1 2
* PS 1 2
*
BUS PI BUS TK BUS PI BUS TK
OUT M OUT M

346020 346020
230 Vac 230 Vac
346150 110-240 Vac 110-240 Vac
= – = – 346150
M1 346050 M1 346050
= – = –
= – = –
N1 5 6 7 8 PS 2 1
N1 5 6 7 8 PS 2 1

= – = –
PE 1 2 3 4 OUT M BUS PI BUS TK PE 1 2 3 4 OUT M BUS PI BUS TK
PRI PRI

= – = –
M2 M2
346020 346020
JM P

JM P

M1 N1 M2 N2 PRI: 220 – 240 V~ M1 N1 M2 N2 PRI: 220 – 240 V~

= – = –
175 – 165 mA 175 – 165 mA
47/63 Hz 47/63 Hz
SCS: 27 Vdc SCS: 27 Vdc
600 mA 600 mA

= – = –
N2 N2
= – = –
5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8
IN 1 2 3 4 OU T 1 2 3 4 IN 1 2 3 4 OU T 1 2 3 4

J = JMP J = JMP
SCS 2 1 SCS 2 1
12 34567 8 12 345678 12 3 45678 1 2345678

8 wires 8 wires
digital 8 8 digital 8 8
system system
backbone backbone

Interfaces 346150 must always be properly configured

3.1.6-3
CONNECTION IN APARTMENT WITH 6 DIN POWER SUPPLY 346050

In order to connect an apartment EP saving DIN modules, it is possible to use the power supply 346050 without A/V node.

APARTMENT 2

344672 344672 344672 344672

ON ON ON ON

MASTER MASTER MASTER MASTER

= – = – = – = –
N N N N
= 1 = 2 = 3 = 4
BUS = – BUS = – BUS = – BUS = –
P P P P
= – = – = – = –
= – = – = – = –
M M M M
= 3 = 3 = 3 = 3

To the apartments
or apartment
interfaces

346850

INT 346850

ON
344672
EXT
ON
346841
ON OF F

OFF
MASTER
= –
N
= 2
M = 3 BUS = –
N
= 5
= –
P
= –
= –
M
= 3

110-240 Vac
346050
2 WIRES riser for
apartment block

343081

TK PI SCS

P
= –
S
BUS TK BUS PI
= 1
= –
N
= 1
PS
T = –
S = 9

CAUTION
„ Configure the apartment Entrance Panels from P = 1.
„ Configure the apartment IU from N = 1
„ As for one-family systems, all internal units must be configured as MASTER. The internal unit configured with N= 1 rings and
switches on, while the others ring. If the call is answered from an internal unit with the monitor switched off, the monitor of the
internal unit configured with N = 1 switches off and the monitor of the internal unit being used for answering switches on.
2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1.6-4
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VARIANTS

Wiring diagrams variants for DIN rail devices

RISER CONNECTION WITH 6 DIN POWER SUPPLY 346050

In order to connect an apartment EP saving DIN modules, it is possible to use the power supply 346050 without A/V node.

Riser 2 APARTMENT 2
344652
= –
N
OFF = 2
= –
MASTER P
= 4
M = –

BUS

APARTMENT 1
344652
= –
N
OFF = 1
MASTER = –
P
= 4
M = –

BUS
110-240 Vac
346050

TK PI SCS

346851

346851

ON

ON OFF ON OFF

352400
=–
P
=4
To other risers =–
N
=1
From other risers / A/V node 351100 S =–
T =–
M =–
S J1 = –
352100 JMP

PS

NOTE: It is not possible to add other riser entrance panels without using the audio/video node F441.

3.1.6-5
Auxiliary services – Floor call

FLOOR CALL

With CLASSE 100, CLASSE 300EOS and SPRINT L2 344232) internal units, it is possible to have the "call to the floor"
function". In other words, by connecting a pushbutton between the clamps ( ) it is possible to use the internal
ringtone of the devices to make the call from the apartment entrance door. In installations with IU in parallel, only the
Internal Unit to which the call pushbutton is connected will ring.

344842 344232 344282

BUS BUS BUS

EXAMPLE - Connection of a CLASSE EXAMPLE - Connection of a SPRINT L2 EXAMPLE - Connection of a CLASSE

300EOS video internal unit audio internal unit 100A16E handsfree audio internal unit

- The maximum distance between the call to the floor pushbutton and the internal unit is 15 metres.

BUS FLOOR CALL WITH INTERFACE 346833

To be used for the call to the floor, so that several internal units connected to the BUS will ring with one single button.
By using the call to the floor interface,the following is possible by pressing one pushbutton:
- the addressed floor call MOD = 0
- the general floor call MOD = 1

ADDRESSED FLOOR CALL WITH 346833 CONFIGURED WITH MOD = 0

APARTMENT 12 APARTMENT 3

N = 12 N=3
346833 346833
= – = –
P P
= – = –
= 1 = –
N N
= 2 344672 = 3
344672
MOD = – MOD = –

BUS

BUS
BUS BUS
Distance Distance
346833 - pushbutton 346833 - pushbutton
max 3 m max 3 m
Pushbutton Pushbutton

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1.7-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VARIANTS

Auxiliary services – Floor call

GENERAL FLOOR CALL WITH 346833 CONFIGURED WITH MOD = 1

APARTMENT

All the IU ring

= –
P
= – 344672 344672 344672
= –
N N=1 N=2 N=3
= –
MOD = 1

346833
BUS BUS BUS

BUS

Configuration to be used in one-family systems or multi-family systems

Pushbutton after apartment interface 346850.

Distance NOTE: By configuring interface 346833 with MOD=4, it is

346833 - pushbutton possible to associate the video image of a camera to the call
max 3 m to the floor generated by the pushbutton outside the door.

BUS FLOOR CALL WITH SPECIAL CONTROL L4651M2/H4651M2

By using special control L4651M2/H4651M2, it is possible to make the call to the floor through the BUS. By inserting the
special control on the IU BUS (in video systems, the special control must be in-out connected on the IU BUS) and configuring
it for the call to the floor, it is possible to have the function without further wiring between entrance and Internal Unit. In
installations with IU in parallel, upon arrival of the call to the floor all the Internal Units of the apartment ring.

APARTMENT 5 APARTMENT 13

L4651M2 L4651M2
H4651M2 344652 344652 H4651M2
A = – ON A = 1
PL = 5 OFF PL = 3
M = 2 MASTER MASTER M = 2
SPE = 7 SPE = 7
AUX = – = – = 1 AUX = –
N N
= 5 = 3
= – = –
P P
= – = –
BUS M = – BUS M = – BUS BUS
BUS

EXAMPLE - BUS floor call - connection before the EXAMPLE - BUS floor call - connection after the Internal
Internal Unit Unit. If the special control is connected as the last apartment
or riser line device, it is necessary to connect a 3499
terminator in an IN-OUT mode on the control itself.

3.1.7-2
Auxiliary services – Door lock control

DOOR LOCK CONTROL CONNECTION

SFERA ENTRANCE PANELS

S Wiring for door lock release control from the

appropriate IU key and the PS key.
Between S+ and S- are available
PS 18 V -4 A impulsive (250 mA holding current)
30 Ohm max.
Timing from key (PS) as per the configurator in
(T) of the speaker module.

LINEA 300 ENTRANCE PANELS

2 1
USB

J2
J1
P
N
Wiring for door lock release control from the

TS
S
2 1 BUS PL S+ S−

appropriate IU key and the PS key.

Between S+ and S- are available
18 V -4 A impulsive (250 mA holding current)
PS 30 Ohm max

LINEA 2000 ENTRANCE PANELS

S Wiring for door lock release control from

the appropriate IU key and the PS key.
Between S+ and S- are available
PS 18 V -4 A impulsive (250 mA holding current)
30 Ohm max.
342911 343031

LINEA 3000 ENTRANCE PANELS

S Wiring for door lock release control from

the appropriate IU key and the PS key.
Between S+ and S- are available
PS 18 V -4 A impulsive (250 mA holding
current) 30 Ohm max
Timing from key (PS) as per the
configurator in (T) of the speaker module.
343071 343081
343091
343093

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1.8-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VARIANTS

Auxiliary services - Door lock control

DOOR LOCK CONTROL FROM BUS

(Installation in video systems)

By using special control L4651M2/H4651M2, the door

L4651M2 A = –
lock release control is timed H4651M2 PL = –
The pushbutton marked with X opens the door lock of
X M = 1 BUS PI
SPE = 7
the Entrance Panel configured with P = 0 (the special AUX = –
control configured with A=0 and PL=0 acts on the EP BUS
configured with P=0).

110-240 Vac
= – 346050
P
P1 P2 = –
P1 = A/PL + 1 = – BUS PL S+ S-
N
= 1
P2 = A/PL + 3
T = –
P3 = A/PL
P4 = A/PL + 2 S
P3 P4

NOTE: in audio systems, the wiring of the special

control can be at any point within the system. BUS TK

CONTROL OF 2 DOOR LOCKS WITH SFERA KEYPAD MODULE 353000

(installation in audio/audio-video systems)

351100 - 351200 - 351300 BUS PI

110-240 Vac
346050

S1

BUS TK

A = – 353000
B = –
C = – 230 Vac S2
= – Auxiliary transformer
M
= 3
T = –

S1 Electrical door lock 18 V S2 Contact output (C-NO): NOTE: in order to control the door lock directly connected to the
4 A impulsive 250 mA holding 8 A 30 Vdc speaker module or audio/video module, type on the keypad +
current 30 Ohm max. 8 A 30 Vac cosφ 1 door lock opening code + confirmation;
3.5 A 30 Vac cosφ 0.4
in order to control the second door lock connected to the local relay
contact, type on the keypad + + door lock opening code +
confirmation.

3.1.8-2
SAFETY DOOR LOCK CONTROL (VENTOUSE TYPE)

IU BUS
110-240 Vac
TK BUS 346050

346250
8 A COSΦ = 1 24 VDC; 24 VAC
8 A COSΦ = 0.7 24 VAC
8 A COSΦ = 1 24 VAC

S
230 Vac
Transformer Safety door lock
auxiliary (ventouse type)

NOTE: The safety door lock remains closed in case of permanent voltage. It opens when the power supply is interrupted.
Interruption time as per the configurator in (T) of the speaker module.

DOOR LOCK CONTROL NOT MANAGED FROM BUS

IU BUS
110-240 Vac
346050

346250
8 A COSΦ = 1 24 VDC; 24 VAC
8 A COSΦ = 0.7 24 VAC
8 A COSΦ = 1 24 VAC

S
230 Vac
Transformer
auxiliary

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1.8-3

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VARIANTS

Auxiliary services - Door lock control

DOOR LOCK CONTROL WITH GENERIC ACTUATOR 346210

Should it be necessary to open a The actuator must be configured

door lock at the same time as the with MOD =5 and is controlled by
one connected to the EP speaker the appropriate pushbutton of the
module, or to remotely control IU and the PS key. The contacts
the same, actuator 346210 can be may be crossed by a maximum
used. current of 6 A (resistive) – 2 A
(inductive) – cos φ=0.5.

MOD = 5 1 2 3
= – 1 2 3

M
= –
= –
N/P
= –
346210
T = –

PS *

TR S
230 Vac
Transformer
auxiliary
BUS

* Contact timing activation as per configurator in T

- The maximum distance between the call to the floor pushbutton and the actuator is 15 metres.

DOOR LOCK CONTROL WITH INTERFACE 346833

Call to the floor interface 346833 MOD = 2 Door lock associated in P PL1-C
also gives the possibility of opening MOD = 3 Door lock associated in P PL1-C
door locks using appropriately Door lock associated in P +1 PL2-C
connected pushbuttons.
S2

346230
1 2 PL S+ S- P=1
346833 = –
346230
P
To the TK BUS clamp = –
= –
of power supply unit N
= –
346050 or to the IN
P T

= –
clamp of A/V node F441 MOD
= 3

Release Release
pushbutton pushbutton
BUS PL S+ S-
S1 S2
P=0 BUS

S1

Distance 346833 – pushbutton = max 3 m

3.1.8-4
DOOR LOCK CONTROL WITH ACTUATORS 346230 OR 346260

The use of the actuators is indicated in installations where the direct connection of the electric door lock release is
not wanted, but it is necessary to have, always with 2 wires, wiring that cannot be accessed from the Entrance Panel,
positioning the actuator that controls the door lock in a remote area.
It can also be used for the implementation of the "door lock status control" function (actuator 346260 only).
The wiring is completely of the 2 WIRES type, including the power supply to the electric door lock.
The actuator is controlled by the door lock pushbutton of the IU.
The device must be properly configured.

NOTE: in video systems, the wiring must be completed in IN-OUT mode on the TK BUS clamp of power supply unit 346050 or the IN clamp of the
audio/video node.

* Door lock * Door lock

release release
pushbutton pushbutton
from entrance from entrance
System power hall System power hall
supply supply
* The control is not
BUS BUS BUS BUS timed

346230 18V 4A 18V 4A 346260 18V 4A 18V 4A

1 2 PL S+ S- - TMP PL RC
1 2 PL S+ S- - CTMP NCPL NO/S+
RC S- C NC NO/S+ S-
S+S- = 18 V 4 A ART. 346260
impulsive 250 mA ART. 346260
346230 346230
holding current T= -5 +45°C
IP 30
T= -5 +45°C
(30 Ohm max) IP 30

J J JJ J J J J J J
J J J J
MM SCS SCS M
J J
M MM
P T M M M P T M M M MM M M
P P MM
P P
PP P P P P
P P
P P P P

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1.8-5

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 WIRING DIAGRAMS - VARIANTS

Auxiliary services – Staircase light control

BUS STAIRCASE LIGHT CONTROL WITH ACTUATOR 346210

(Installation in video systems)
BUS PI

346210

110-240Vac 1 2 3
MOD = – 1 2 3

346050 M
= –
= –
= –
N/P 346210
= –
T = –

BUS TK
SCS
230 Vac L

Wiring for staircase light control from the appropriate IU key, and the staircase light key of
preset Entrance Panels.

CAUTION: the (BUS PI), (BUS TK) and (SCS) outputs can be used at the same time respecting the total maximum absorption of 1.2 A.

BUS STAIRCASE LIGHT CONTROL WITH SPECIAL CONTROL L4651M2/H4651M2

(Installation in video systems) Example associated
to the IU (N=2)
By using the special control, the switching
on of the light is timed.

BUS PI

associated to the
IU = 2
L4651M2 A = –
H4651M2 PL = 2
BUS
M = 3
SPE = 7 346210
AUX = –
1120-240 Vac 1 2 3
MOD = 1
346050
1 2 3

= –
M
= 1
346210 = –
N/P
= 2
T = –

BUS TK
SCS
230 Vac L

The special control acts on actuator 346210 configured to switch the lights on.
For further details, see the technical sheets of the special control and of actuator 346210.

NOTE: in audio systems, the wiring of the special control can be at any point within the system

3.1.9-1
STAIRCASE LIGHT CONTROL WITH INTERFACE 346833

Call to the floor interface 346833 gives MOD = 0

the possibility of switching the staircase MOD = 1 Staircase PL2-C
lights on using an appropriately connected MOD = 2 Lights
pushbutton.

BUS PI

346833
= –
P
= –
BUS = –
N
= –
= –
MOD
= 2
Distance 346833 - pushbutton max 3 m

Staircase
346210 light
pushbutton
110-240 Vac
MOD = – 1 2 3
346050 = –
1 2 3

M
= –
= –
N/P 346210
= –
T = –

BUS TK
SCS 230 Vac L

LIGHT CONTROL FOR THE ILLUMINATION OF THE CAMERA FIELD OF VIEW

346210
BUS PI
PE
110-240 Vac 1
1 2
2
3
3

BUS TK 346050
346210
MOD = 7
= –
M
= –
BUS PL S+ S- = –
N/P
= 1
P=1 T = –

BUS PI
SCS
230 Vac L

Closure of the contact upon call from the EP configured with P=1.
The contact opens after the call is ended and the handset is put down, or after 30 s (without answer).

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 3.1.9-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
4 INSPECTION AND PUTTING
INTO OPERATION
 GENERAL FEATURES

Inspection and putting into operation of a 2 WIRES system

INSPECTION
After completing the installation of the 2 WIRES audio or video door entry system, before powering the circuit it will be
necessary to control that all wiring is correct and that internal units, entrance panels, actuators and all other system
accessories have been configured as required.
If all the checks give positive results, carry out the following system operation tests:

1) Power the system and wait 1 minute for all the

devices to switch on. Make a call from the entrance
panel to the first internal unit: this will send an
electronic signal to the speaker of the internal unit
and a call confirmation sound to the entrance panel
speaker module that has made the call.
When a call
is made a
confirmation
sound is heard

2) By plugging the appropriate configurator to the M

Example for SFERA entrance panels
housing, it is possible to disable the door lock sound
(for other entrance panels the configurators are different)
or all the sounds at the entrance panel.
Configurator M=0 M=1 M=2 M=3
Door
All tones Call tone All tones
Tone status lock tone
enabled disabled disabled
disabled

3) When the internal unit rings, press the connection

key or lift the handset to establish communication
with the entrance panel. In video systems, after the Test the
bidirectional
call tone the video internal unit monitor switches audio
on; if the call is from an audio only entrance panel,
the monitor stays off.
Check that sound travels in both direction (from
and to the entrance panel), and that images are
Check the image quality
displayed correctly.
Make test calls from all the entrance panels to all
the internal units of the system.

4) Check all the internal units to make sure that

the door lock, entrance panel auto-switching on
and staircase light keys (if present) are working
correctly. Check that with the internal unit idle (no
active call) the door lock button operates the door
lock of the associated entrance panel, and that
AK

with the call active it operates the door lock of the

CL

entrance panel that has made the call. The door lock opens
With digital call module (display 352500 or display
352500 + keypad 353000), check that the address
book contains the contacts of all residents and
repeat the call test from step (1).

4.1-1
5) Check that the auto-switching on / cycling pushbutton
operates the entrance panel associated to the internal
unit, that cycling is performed correctly (if several
entrance panels are installed), and that the door lock
pushbutton operates the door lock of the entrance
panel activated with the cycling procedure.

The images recorded

by the entrance panel
are displayed on the
internal unit monitor

6) Check that during a conversation and for the 30

seconds after a call is sent the other internal units
and entrance panels of the system (not involved in the
communication) are unable to make calls. When a call
is made, an engaged sound notification is heard at the
entrance panel. Communicating

Entrance panel temporarily excluded

– Check that after 1 minute the internal unit is
disconnected
even if the communication has not been stopped.

– In case of isolated risers, repeat the test for

each riser entrance.

7) For systems with Intercom function, check that it

is possible to call other devices, and that during
the call the other internal units not involved in the
communication are disabled (when a call is made an Appartamento 1 Appartamento 2
engaged sound is heard).

Note: The call from the entrance panel has priority on

the Intercom call and will replace it.
Intercom call

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 4.1-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

Inspection and putting into operation of a 2 WIRES system

If the system requires the use of one or more connected Classe 300EOS / Classe 100X16E video internal units, it will be
necessary to consider the following:

Apartment block or multi-family context

2 WIRES
apartment block Video internal unit
riser Classe 300EOS
Additional
power supply
In multi-family systems, the Classe 300EOS video internal
unit must be powered locally – clamps (1 – 2), using the PRI

additional power supply unit 346020. 346020

PRI: 220 - 240V~
175-165mA
50/60Hz
1-2: 27Vdc
600mA

1 2

1 2
External 1 2 2
pushbutton
panel 2

AV node + Power supply

2 2

During the commissioning stage, the Classe 300EOS /

Classe 100X video internal unit and the smartphone must
both be connected to the same Wi-Fi network.
The Wi-Fi network must be on a 2.4 GHz band.
DOOR ENTRY

Camera

Serrature

SERRATURA

Chiama Casa

In case of abnormal operation, carry out a troubleshooting procedure, making reference

to the DIAGNOSTIC - TROUBLESHOOTING section below.

4.1-3
Diagnostic - Troubleshooting

The troubleshooting procedure must be completed rationally. Before carrying out any operations on the system, check the
diagram and the type of system, its extension, that the devices are being used and are configured correctly.
With the appropriate splitting into sections, all the systems, even the more complex ones, can be traced back to a basic
one to make the activities easier.

BASIC SYSTEM
2 WIRES audio and video systems can be simplified in
line with the following block diagrams.

Legend:
PE P = Main entrance panel configured with (P = 0)
PI = Audio or video internal unit / apartment
interface
ALIM = System power supply
DP = Video floor shunt

2 WIRES AUDIO system 2 WIRES VIDEO system

GENERAL CONTROLS 346050

- Check that the installation distances have been V
27
respected and that the recommended cables have
been used.

– Check the voltages (with the components connected) PRI PRI

on the clamps of the system power supply unit (BUS

TK, BUS PI, SCS clamps 346050 – 27 V) or BUS BUS

346040
clamps 346040 – 26 V). 346040 PRI 110 - 240 V 50 - 60 Hz 370 mA - 225 mA
BUS 26.0 V 600 mA BUS

If the voltages are different, check the power supply V

PRI PRI
26
unit without load (no connected components). If the 346040
BUS

indicated voltages can be measured in this condition,

PRI 110 - 240 V 50 - 60 Hz 370 mA - 225 mA
BUS 26.0 V 600 mA BUS

it means that there is a short circuit on the system:

separate the system into sections and repeat the
checks. If the voltages are still different, check the
network power supply and replace the system power
supply unit if necessary.

- Check that the devices are working correctly (by

connecting them to another point of the system).

- Check that the plug-in clamps are plugged in

correctly and in the correct housings.

Check that the connections have been completed

correctly.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 4.2-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

Diagnostic - Troubleshooting

Below is a list of the most common faults and their solutions.

TYPE OF FAULT SOLUTION

- The call tone is heard at the entrance panel, but no - Check the EP and IU configuration in (N).
internal unit rings
- Check that the configuration is appropriate for the
system (presence of apartment interface, system
expansion interface, etc.).

- Check that the cables are correctly connected to the

power supply BUS clamps.

Do not connect the BUS

to clamps (2 - 1)

- When using an additional power supply unit

(clamps 2 - 1). make sure that the BUS cable is also
connected, and that the polarity requirement is met
for clamps 2– 1.

- Check the connection order of the entrance panel

SFERA module and the corresponding IN - OUT flat
cable connections

Example 1 Example 2
Speaker Speaker
module/ module/Audio
Audio video video

Pushbut- RFID
tons Door lock
release

Pushbut- Pushbut-
tons tons

Caution : "advanced" function modules (keypad 353000

and door opening RFID 353200), must be connected
before any pushbutton modules (352000 – 352100) of
the system.

4.2-2
TYPE OF FAULT SOLUTION

– The internal unit does not ring - Check the IU configuration.

- Check that call exclusion is not active and the

volume of the ringtone.

- Check the cables connections to the internal unit

clamps.

Classe 300EOS Classe 100X16E Classe 100V16B

Classe 100V16E

Classe 100A16E Classe 100A16M Sprint L2

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 4.2-3

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

Diagnostic - Troubleshooting

TYPE OF FAULT SOLUTION

- The monitor switches on but no image is displayed, – Check that the IU microswitch (ON – OFF) is
or the image quality is poor. positioned correctly (ON the last IU of the line).

– Check that all system connections and junctions

have been completed correctly.

– Check that the entrance panel camera is focused

correctly.

– Check that the IU is set to “MASTER”.

– If using a Sfera entrance panel with wide angle

N&D camera (352400), check its connection to the
speaker module (351100).

– On the internal unit, check the display brightness,

contrast and colour adjustments.

– Check that the maximum distances between

entrance panel and internal unit are not exceeded.

- The door lock is excited for too long. – On the EP speaker module check that the configu-
rator plugged in the (T) housing meets the timing
requirements, as indicated in the specific techni-
cal data sheet.

- In single-family systems with intercom function, – Check that a configurator (9) has been plugged
when a call is received from the entrance panel not all to the housing (S) of the speaker module of the en-
internal units ring. trance panel.

P N S T M J1 J2

– Check that the internal units are correctly

configured in N; refer to the connection diagrams
found in the guide.

4.2-4
TYPE OF FAULT SOLUTION

- In single-family systems with intercom function, – Check the configuration M on the IU. Check that the
when call is sent from one internal unit to another, operating mode assigned to the internal unit keys is
nothing happens. consistent with the requested function.
Refer to the specific IU technical sheets.

N P M

– The door lock control does not work – Check the characteristics and operation of the
electric door lock.

– In order to rule out any entrance panel faults,

open the door lock using the local pushbutton
directly connected to the entrance panel.

S
PS

– If this works correctly, check the configuration (P)

on entrance panels and internal units.

– Check the operation of the door lock with the

system “IDLE”.

– Check the operation of the door lock with the

system “CONNECTED”.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 4.2-5

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

Diagnostic - Troubleshooting

i
TYPE OF FAULT SOLUTION

– The actuator 346210 does not work – In order to rule out any actuator faults, send
the command using the local control directly
connected to the device.

346210

PS

BUS

– Check the configuration of the actuator to make

sure that it complies with the requirements of the
technical data sheet.

MOD
M N/P T
BUS

1 2 3
1 2 3

346210

– Check the configuration of the internal unit and

that the configurators are correctly plugged into
their respective housings.

– Check the BUS wiring.

– Check the voltage on the BUS clamps.

4.2-6
TYPE OF FAULT SOLUTION

– The actuator 346230 does not work

– Check the configuration of the actuator to make
sure that it complies with the requirements of the
technical data sheet.

– Check that the configuration is consistent with

the mode of operation of the internal unit and the
corresponding key associated to the actuator.

– Check if there is a need for “JMP” configurators,

depending on the selected operating mode.

– In video systems with risers and line expansions, – Check that on the last internal unit of the
the image is degraded and of poor quality. apartment riser or line, the video signal
impedance has been adapted (microswitch in the
ON position).

– Check that the apartment interface (346850) or

the system expansion interface (346851) have
been installed, and the status - video signal level -
indicated by the LED

Green LED = ok
ON Green/red LED= video
signal near the limit
Red LED = no video signal
or limit exceeded

NOTE : in the audio systems, the LED is red.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 4.2-7

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 GENERAL FEATURES

Diagnostic - Troubleshooting

Systems with
Classe 300EOS / Classe 100X16E
connected video internal units DOOR ENTRY

Camera

Serrature

SERRATURA

Chiama Casa

TYPE OF FAULT SOLUTION

- No video door entry system call received on the – Check the Wi-Fi signal level on the IU.
smartphone

- Red LED flashing = Wi-Fi is active but not connected to a

network;

- LED off = working correctly

– Check that the router is actually connected to the

Internet.

– Check that the date and time of the internal unit

are correct.

– Check if any internal unit firmware updates are

available.

– Check if any Home + Security APP updates are

available.

– Check that PUSH notifications are enabled on your

smartphone.

4.2-8
Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

5 CATALOGUE
 CATALOGUE

ENTRANCE PANELS
Overview and features

Linea Sfera New Linea Sfera Robur Linea 3000

Audio

Colour video

Finishes / Colours Allmetal

Allwhite Zamak Robur Zamak grey
Allstreet Zamak black

Wall mounted
installation

Flush mounted
installation

Pushbutton call

Digital call

Wide angle
camera (1)

Night & Day

camera (2)

Control speech
synthesis (3)

Door lock release

with keypad

Door lock release

with key card

Rainshield

Vandal proof

Protection index IP54 IP54 IP54

Sturdiness index Up to IK08 IK10 IK10

Max. number 100 with pushbuttons 100 with pushbuttons

4000 with digital call 4000 with digital call 2
of calls

(1) Horizontal and vertical wide viewing field. Easy to use for children and differently-abled people.
(2) Night lighting thanks to the IR LED with automatic IR filter. Sharp, perfect images even in limited light conditions.
(3) Inductive loop and control speech synthesis. Use by people wearing hearing aids. Easy to use for visually impaired people.

5.1-1
 Linea 2000 Linea 300 Linea 100

Stainless Steel
Aluminium Aluminium Stainless Steel

IP54 IP54 IP44

IK07 IK07 IK08

2 32 with pushbuttons 8 with pushbuttons

(up to 4 calls - audio version only) 4000 with digital call 4000 with digital call

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.1-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

ENTRANCE PANEL
SFERA

SFERA NEW

SFERA ROBUR

TWO STYLES
ONE ELECTRONIC
HEART
2-wires simplicity, maximum performance
Exceptional audio and video performance as well as fast and simple
installation can be achieved with 2-wires technology
Up to 4000 dwellings
20 handsets per dwelling
Up to 96 video entrance panels
Operable range of 600 m between entrance panel and internal unit

5.1-3
2 DESIGNS

SFERA NEW SFERA ROBUR

A modern and sleek design suitable for residential Sturdy materials and optional flush-mounting
and commercial developments. boxes providing increased safety and
preventing removal of the device

Audio or video pushbutton Call from Audio or video pushbutton Digital

entrance panel address book entrance panel call

12 FUNCTIONS
TRADITIONAL ADVANCED

Basic speaker Speaker Audio/video 4 push-buttons Audio/video Night/day Inductive loop and
module module module module wide-angle wide-angle control speech
camera module camera module synthesis module

DOOR LOCK RELEASE

8 push-buttons Nameplate Graphic display

module module module

Keypad Badge reader

module module

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.1-4

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

SFERA NEW
Examples to select parts of the system

FINISHES INSTALLATION TYPE FLUSH-MOUNTING BOXES RAINSHIELDS (OPTIONAL) FRAMES/PLATES

 FLUSH-MOUNTING INSTALLATION Cat.Nos Pack Cat.Nos Pack Cat.Nos Pack

A C D E F A C D
Allmetal (silver)

1 1 1

350010 35051.. 35054.. 35021..

1 module 1 module 4 modules 1 module

1
Flush-
mounting
box Rainshield
1 1 1
Frame +
surround Function
plate modules Front 350020 35052.. 352500 35022..
covers 2 modules 2 modules 6 modules 2 modules

Allwhite (white)

1 1 1

350030 35053.. 35059.. 35023..

3 modules 3 modules 9 modules 3 modules

INSTALLATION TYPE SURFACE-MOUNTING BOXES FRAMES/PLATES

SURFACE-MOUNTING INSTALLATION Cat.Nos Pack Cat.Nos Pack

B D E F B D

Allstreet (grey) 1 1

35061.. 35064.. 35021..

1 module 4 modules 1 module

1 1

35062.. 35066.. 35022..

3 2 modules 6 modules 2 modules
Surface-
mounting
box with Frame +
in-buit surround Function
rainshield plate modules Front
covers 1 1

35063.. 35069.. 35023..

3 modules 9 modules 3 modules

CHOOSE YOUR FINISH: Replace the dots in the Cat. No. with either 1, 2, or 3 to select the desired finish
5.1-5
 DIGITAL FRONT COVERS
FUNCTION MODULES
Cat.Nos Pack Cat.Nos Pack
E F Audio front covers

351000
Basic speaker
module 1 1
35100.. 35101.. 35102.. 35104.. 35108..
(FOR AUDIO SYSTEMS ONLY) Basic speaker module Basic speaker module Basic speaker module Basic speaker module Basic speaker module
Speakers

1 push-button 2 push-buttons 2 push-buttons/double row 4 push-buttons/double row

351100
Speaker module
1 1
35110.. 35111.. 35112.. 35114.. 35118..
Speaker module Speaker module Speaker module Speaker module Speaker module
1 push-button 2 push-buttons 2 push-buttons/double row 4 push-buttons/double row
352000
4 push-buttons/
single row 1 1
35203.. 35204.. 352011 352021
Push-buttons

3 push-buttons 4 push-buttons 1 push-button 2 push-buttons

352100
8 push-buttons/
double row 1 1
35216.. 35218.. 352121 352141
6 push-buttons/double row 8 push-buttons/double row 2 push-buttons/double row 4 push-buttons/double row
E F Video front covers
351200
Audio/video
1 1
35120.. 35121.. 35122..
Audio/video Audio/video Audio/video
1 push-button 2 push-buttons/double row
351300
Audio/video with wide
Cameras

angle camera
1 1
35130.. 35131.. 35132..
Audio/video wide angle Audio/video wide angle Audio/video wide angle
1 push-button 2 push-buttons / double row
354000
352400 Cable for the
Night/day with connection or several
wide angle camera 1 push-button modules 1
35240.. L= 470 mm
Night/day with wide angle camera
E F Miscellaneous front covers
352200
Name plate
1 1
35220..
Name plate
352500
Graphic display
1 1
35250..
Graphic display
352700
Miscellaneous

Inductive loop
and control 1 1
speech synthesis 35270..
Inductive loop-speech synthesis
353200 35230..
Badge reader Blanking reader
1 1
35320..
Badge reader
353000
Keypad
1 1
35300.. 353011
Numeric keypad Alphanumeric keypad
CHOOSE YOUR FINISH: Replace the dots in the Cat. No. with either 1, 2, or 3 to select the desired finish
2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.1-6
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

SFERA ROBUR
Examples to select parts of the system

SUPPORT
FINISHES INSTALLATION TYPE FLUSH-MOUNTING BOXES FRAMES/PLATES
FRAMES
FLUSH-MOUNTING INSTALLATION Cat.Nos Pack Cat.Nos Pack Cat.Nos Pack

A C D E F A C D

1 1 1

350110 350315 350415

1 module 1 module 1 module

Flush-
mounting Frame +
box support 1 1 1
Function
modules Front
covers Surround 350120 350325 350425
plate 2 modules 2 modules 2 modules

Vandal -resistant
(ROBUR)

1 1 1

350130 350335 350435

3 modules 3 modules 3 modules

SUPPORT
INSTALLATION TYPE SURFACE-MOUNTING BOXES FRAMES FRAMES/PLATES

SURFACE-MOUNTING INSTALLATION Cat.Nos Pack Cat.Nos Pack Cat.Nos Pack

B C D E F B (*) C D

1 1 1
350315 350415
35061.. 35064.. 1 module 1 module
1 module 4 modules

1 1 1
Surface- 350325 350425
mounting Frame + 2 modules 2 modules
box with support Function 35062.. 35066..
in-built modules 2 modules 6 modules
rainshield Front
covers Surround
plate

1 1 1

35063.. 35069.. 350335 350435

3 modules 9 modules 3 modules 3 modules

(*) CHOOSE YOUR FINISH: Replace the dots in the Cat. No. with either 1, 2, or 3 to select the desired finish - Refer to SFERA NEW finishes.
5.1-7
 DIGITAL FRONT COVERS
FUNCTION MODULES
Cat.Nos Pack Cat.Nos Pack
E F Audio front covers

351000
Basic speaker
module 1 1
351005 351015 351025 351045 351085
Basic speaker Basic speaker module Basic speaker module Basic speaker module
Speakers

(FOR AUDIO SYSTEMS ONLY) Basic speaker module

module 1 push-button 2 push-buttons 2 push-buttons/double row 4 push-buttons/double row
351100
Speaker module
1 1
351105 351115 351125 351145 351185
Speaker module Speaker module Speaker module Speaker module Speaker module
1 push-button 2 push-buttons 2 push-buttons/double row 4 push-buttons/double row
352000
4 push-buttons/
single row 1 1
352035 352045
Push-buttons

3 push-buttons 4 push-buttons
352100
8 push-buttons/
double row 1 1
352165 352185
6 push-buttons/double row 8 push-buttons/double row

E F Video front covers

351200
Audio/video
1 1
351205 351215 351225
Audio/video Audio/video Audio/video 2 push-buttons /
1 push-button double row
351300
Audio/video with wide
Cameras

angle camera 1 1
351305 351315 351325
Audio/video wide angle Audio/video wide angle Audio/video wide angle
1 push-button 2 push-buttons / double row
354000
352400 Cable for the
Night/day with connection or several
wide angle camera 1 push-button modules 1
352405 L= 470 mm
Night/day with wide angle camera

E F Miscellaneous front covers

352200
Name plate
1 1
352205
Name plate
352500
Graphic display
1 1
352505
Graphic display
352700
Miscellaneous

Inductive loop
and control 1 1
speech synthesis 352705
Inductive loop-speech synthesis
353200 352305
Badge reader Blanking reader
1 1
353205
Badge reader
353000
Keypad
1 1
353005
Keypad

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.1-8

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

SFERA
Electronic modules

351000 351100 351200 351300 352000 352100 352200

Pack Item Electronic modules Pack Item Electronic modules

1 351000 Basic speaker module for the creation of 2 WIRE 1 351300 Wide angle audio/video module for the installation
audio systems. of 2 WIRE colour video systems.
Fitted with loudspeaker and microphone volume With Colour camera with 1/3” sensor and white
adjustment. It manages up to 100 pushbutton LEDs for the lighting of the shooting field. Mist
calls using additional double row pushbuttons. It prevention heating resistance. Loudspeaker and
can be used for opening an eleactrical door lock Microphone volume adjustments. It can manage up
directly connected to the S+ and S- clamps (18 V 4 to 98 pushbutton calls using the additional double
A impulsive - 250 mA holding current 30 Ohm max) row pushbutton modules. It offers the possibility of
and the connection to a local door lock release opening an electrical door lock directly connected
pushbutton on the PL clamps. To be completed to clamps S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA
with surround plate. The device must be physically holding current 30 Ohm max) and of connecting a
configured. local door lock release pushbutton on clamps PL.
1 351100 Speaker module for the creation of 2 WIRE audio Preset for additional power supply. Fitted with front
& video systems. Fitted with loudspeaker and LEDs for the notification of the operating status:
microphone volume adjustment. It can manage up to door lock release, communication active, call put
100 pushbutton calls when using additional double through, and system busy. Integrated optic sensor
row pushbutton modules. It can be used for opening for the switching on of the night backlighting.
an electrical door lock directly connected to the S+ To be completed with surround plate. The device
and S- clamps (18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA holding must be configured physically or using a PC and the
current 30 Ohm max) and the connection to a local TiSferaDesign software
door lock release pushbutton on the PL clamps.
Preset for additional power supply. Fitted with front 1 352000 Additional 4-pushbutton modules arranged on
LEDs for the notification of the operating status: single column.
door lock release, communication active, call put To be used with speaker modules 351000 - 351100
through, and system busy. Integrated optic sensor and audio/video modules 351200 - 351300.
for the switching on of the night backlighting. To be Connection using the appropriate multicable
completed with surround plate. The device can be supplied. Backlighting of nameplates controlled
configured either physically or using the PC and the by the speaker module or the audio/video module
TiSferaDesign software. connected. To be completed with surround plate

1 351200 Audio video module for the installation of 2 WIRE 1 352100 Additional 8-pushbutton modules arranged on
colour video systems. With Colour camera with double column.
1/3” sensor and white LEDs for the lighting of the To be used with speaker modules 351000 – 351100
shooting field. Mist prevention heating resistance. and audio/video modules 351200 - 351300.
Loudspeaker and Microphone volume adjustments. Connection using the appropriate multicable
It can manage up to 98 pushbutton calls using supplied. Backlighting of nameplates controlled
the additional double row pushbutton modules. by the speaker module or the audio/video module
Horizontal and vertical camera position adjustment, connected. To be completed with surround plate
+/- 10° in both directions. It offers the possibility of
opening an electrical door lock directly connected
to clamps S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive - 250 mA 1 352200 Nameplate module normally used for displaying the
holding current 30 Ohm max) and of connecting a house number or other notifications (e.g. Legend
local door lock release pushbutton on clamps PL. for calls using digital pushbutton panels, opening/
Preset for additional power supply. Fitted with front closing times, etc.).
LEDs for the notification of the operating status: Connection using the appropriate multicable
door lock release, communication active, call put supplied. Night backlighting controlled by the
through, and system busy. Integrated optic sensor speaker module or the audio/video module
for the switching on of the night backlighting. To be connected. To be completed with surround plate
completed with surround plate. The device must
be configured physically or using a PC and the
TiSferaDesign software.

5.1-9
352400 352500 352700 353000 353200 346993

348200 348201 348202 348203 348204 348205 348206 348402

Pack Item Electronic modules Pack Item Electronic modules

1 352400 Night & Day and wide angle camera module for the 1 353000 Keypad module for door lock release, or for the
installation of colour video systems. Fitted with 1/3” digital call of the apartment (to be used with the
sensor with N&D function and automatic removal display module). It is fitted with relay with contacts
of the IR filter. IR LED for the lighting of the field of (C – NC – NO) and clamps (CP- P1 – P2) for the
view. Mist prevention heating resistance. Automatic connection of a local door lock release pushbutton.
brightness adjustment. Connection to the speaker The numerical code for the opening of the door lock
module (351100) using the multicable supplied. To be can be programmed using the keypad itself, or using
completed with surround plate a PC after downloading the module programming
file. It also has a programming reset pushbutton and
1 352500 Graphic display module to be used with speaker LEDS for the visual notification of the access status.
module 351100 or with audio/video modules 351200
– 351300 (connection using the multicable supplied). Night backlighting with LEDs. To be completed with
It can operate in two modes: call from address book, surround plate. It is connected to the other modules
or digital call. The call from the address book gives using the appropriate multicable supplied. The
the possibility of sending the call by scrolling on the device may also be used as a stand alone unit with
display the names associated to the residents. It is independent power supply and operation per la
possible to store up to 4000 residents names. Using sola apertura serratura. Configuration performed
the keypad module item 353000 it is also possible to using physical configurators, or a PC with the
directly call the apartment by entering the number TiSferaDesign software installed
corresponding to the resident. The digital call is also 1 353200 RFID badge reader module for the release of the
performed using the keypad module item 353000 door lock by swiping the badge. It manages up
by entering the numerical code. It is recommended to 20000 badges. It’s fitted with relay contacts
that one or more nameplate modules, item 352200, (C – NO - NC) and clamps (CP - P1 - P2) for the
are installed at the side of the pushbutton panel to connection of a local door release pushbutton.
display the correspondence between the numerical The badge for the release of the door lock can be
codes and the names of the users. It is possible programmed from the module itself, or using a PC
to program the names in the address book in after downloading the module programming file. It
two different ways: manual inclusion using the also has a programming reset pushbutton and LEDS
pushbuttons of the display module or inclusion for the visual notification of the access status. Night
using a PC with the TiSferaDesign software backlighting a LEDs. To be completed with surround
installed, by downloading the file to the display plate. It is connected to the other modules using
module (RECOMMENDED). System power supply the appropriate multicable supplied. The device may
cuts do NOT cause the loss of memory data. To be also be used as a stand alone unit with independent
completed with surround plate power supply and operation. Configuration
performed using physical configurators, or a PC
with the TiSferaDesign software installed
1 352700 Inductive loop and control speech synthesis 1 346993 Expander pushbutton module that gives the
module to be used with the 351100 speaker module possibility of connecting call pushbuttons to the
or with audio/video modules 351200 - 351300. SFERA speaker modules (items 351000;
Enable use by people wearing hearing aids 351100; 351200; 351300). Each module can manage
(fitted with T selector) or blind people thanks to up to 8 call pushbuttons. It is possible to connect
the connection status voice message synthesis several expander pushbutton modules (max 96
(call active, call ended, no answer, busy, door call pushbuttons for each Entrance Panel)
open). It is connected to the speaker module
using the appropriate multicable supplied. To be Transponder keys and programmer
completed with surround plate. The device can be
configured either physically or using the PC and the 10 348200 Black transponder key
TiSferaDesign software
10 348201 Red transponder key
10 348202 Green transponder key
10 348203 Blue transponder key
10 348204 Orange transponder key
10 348205 Grey transponder key
10 348206 Yellow transponder key
1 348402 Table-top transponder key programmer

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.1-10

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

LINEA 3000 entrance panel

ONE entrance panel
for every NEED
LINEA 3000 can be configured both for 1 and 2 family house

ONE FAMILY HOUSE

Write the name on the one family nameplate label
(supplied with the product).
Set the internal micro-switch on position 1.

Nina Jean

2
1

TWO FAMILY HOUSE

Replace the nameplate label with the two family one
(supplied with the product).
Write the names on the two
family nameplate label
Set the internal micro-switch on position 2.

Martin
Nina Jean

DeSmart 2
srl 1

LINEA 3000 inside of the new professional kits

For ONE FAMILY house installation, you have to buy

only the kit and all you need is inside it.

For TWO FAMILY house installation, you have to buy

the kit + an additional 2 wires internal unit.
(refer to 2 wires system internal units range).

5.1-11
 HIGH installation
flexibilty
100 mm width
Suitable for POLE INSTALLATION

100 mm

LINEA 3000 is sold for wall mounting installation but with the dedicated ACCESSORIES
(to be purchased separately), you can use the entrance panel for FLUSH MOUNTING INSTALLATION.

Nina Jean

350020 +
343061 (grey version)
343063 (black version)
Also available in black version.
Ideal for renovations………you can reuse the existing flush mounted box.
Same 2 Modules Tersystem and SFERA flush mounting box.

LINEA 3000 can be wall mounted with the dedicated (343051) RAINSHIELD ACCESSORY (to be purchased separately).

343051
(grey version)
343053
(black version)
Also available in black version.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.1-12

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

LINEA 3000 entrance panel

The entrance panels range
dedicated to VILLA STANDARD
HIGH LEVEL APPLICATIONS

refined
detailing
branded
quality

Modern aesthetics
feeling of quality

floating
effect

hidden
technology high relevance
on interaction

robustness Weatherproof Robustness

(IP 54) protection degree (IK 10) protection degree
Zamak finishes IP54 IK10
5.1-13
 Unique DESIGN and
robust PERCEPTION
Same look and ergonomics for all available versions:

LINEA 3000 video LINEA 3000 LINEA 3000

with door lock video audio
release badge

343093 343091 343081 343071

Advanced
FUNCTIONS
Wide angle camera Door lock release
Horizontal and vertical wide viewing field. Easy Door lock release with coloured badges or clear discs.
to use for children and differently-abled People. Additional safe and comfort for all the residents.

105°

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.1-14

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

ENTRANCE PANEL
LINEA 3000

343091 343093 343081 343071 348260 348261

Pack Item LINEA 3000 Video entrance panel Pack Item LINEA 3000 Spare part front covers
with door lock release proximity reader
1 343091 Wall mounted 2-Wires video pushbutton panel
1 343082 Spare part front cover for video entrance
panels 343081 and 343091.
with Zamak front cover, wide angle colour camera
and proximity reader. Fitted with white LED for the 1 343072 Spare part front cover for audio entrance
lighting of the shooting field in low light conditions. panel 343071.
Can be set up for one or two family installation.
It provides the possibility of opening an electrical Door lock release badge and clear disc
door lock connected directly to clamps S+ and
S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding current, 30
1 348260 Set made up of 6 coloured badges which
ohm max). Can manage a maximum of 20 badges can be programmed to open the door
(125 KHz) for electrical door opening (master 1 348261 Set made up of 2 programmable clear discs
system badge included). White LED backlight name which can be programmed to open the door
plate. Protection degree IP54 – protection against
mechanical impact IK10. Supplied 1 set of door
opening badges made up of : 6 coloured badges and
2 clear discs.
1 343093 Same as 343091 but in black finish

LINEA 3000 Video entrance panel

1 343081 Wall mounted 2-Wires video pushbutton panel with
Zamak front cover and wide angle colour camera..
Fitted with white LED for the lighting of the shooting
field in low light conditions. Can be set up for one or
two family installation. It provides the possibility of
opening an electrical door lock connected directly
to clamps S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA
holding current, 30 ohm max). White LED backlight
name plate. Protection degree IP54 – protection
against mechanical impact IK10.

LINEA 3000 Audio entrance panel

1 343071 Wall mounted 2-Wires pushbutton panel with Zamak
front cover. Can be set up for one or two family
installation. It provides the possibility of opening an
electrical door lock connected directly to clamps
S+ and S- (18 V 4 A impulsive, 250 mA holding
current, 30 ohm max). White LED backlight name
plate. Protection degree IP54 – protection against
mechanical impact IK10.

5.1-15
343051 343053 343061 343063 350020

Pack Item LINEA 3000 Rainshield accessory Pack Item LINEA 3000 Flush mounting accessory + plastic
box
1 343051 Rainshield roof accessory for Linea 3000 (343071 –
343081 – 343091) entrance panels.
To be purchased separately. 1 343061 Flush mounting frame accessory for Linea
3000 (343071 – 343081 – 343091) entrance
1 343053 Rainshield roof accessory for Linea 3000 (343093) panels. To be purchased separately.
entrance panel.
To be purchased separately. 1 343063 Flush mounting frame accessory for
Linea 3000 (343093) entrance panel.
To be purchased separately.
1 350020 Plastic box suitable for the flush mounting
installation of Linea 3000 entrance panels
(343071 - 343081 - 343091 - 343093) together
with the specific frame accessory 343061
- 343063. To be purchased separately.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.1-16

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

ENTRANCE PANEL
LINEA 2000

343031 343032 342911 342921 342931 342941

Pack Item Wall mounted colour video entrance panel Pack Item Wall mounted audio entrance panel
1 343031 2 WIRE video pushbutton panel with a call 1 342911 2 WIRE audio pushbutton panel with
key and colour camera. Fitted with white one call pushbutton for wall mounted
installation. Aluminium front cover.
LEDs for the lighting of the shooting field Nameplate lit by green LED
in low light conditions. Aluminium front 1 342921 As item 342911, but with 2 call pushbuttons
cover. Nameplate lit by green LED
1 342931 As item 342911, but with 3 call pushbuttons
1 343032 As item 343031, but with 2 call pushbuttons
1 342941 As item 342911, but with 4 call pushbuttons

5.1-17
 IP44 IK08

LINEA 100

343101 343102 343100

Pack Item Pushbuttons audio entrance panel Pack Item Digital call audio entrance panel
1 343101 2 WIRE audio pushbutton panel with 4 call 1 343100 2 WIRE AUDIO digital call pushbutton panel for
pushbuttons for wall mounted installation. It’s wall mounted installation. The device consists
fitted with rainshield and internal contact (C - of a pushbutton panel with 16 keys and a digital
NO - NC) for the connection of an electrical door display showing the operating status. Using
lock or external actuator (for the power supply to previously saved numerical (SCS addresses)
the electrical door lock allow for the installation or alphanumerical (logical addresses) codes,
of auxiliary transformer item 336482). it is possible to call the internal units, and for
Connections (PL) for a local door the residents to release the door lock using a
lock release pushbutton dedicated numerical code. The pushbutton panel
1 343102 2 WIRE audio pushbutton panel with 8 call manages up to 4000 internal unit addresses
pushbuttons for wall mounted installation. It’s (from 0 to 3999), as well as the direct call to the
fitted with rainshield and internal contact (C - NO 2 WIRE switchboard. It’s fitted with rainshield
- NC) for the connection of an electrical door lock and internal contact (C - NO - NC) for the
or external actuator (for the power supply to the connection of an electrical door lock or external
electrical door lock allow for the installation of actuator (for the power supply to the electrical
auxiliary transformer item 336482). Connections door lock allow for the installation of auxiliary
(PL) for a local door lock release pushbutton transformer item 336482). Connections (PL)
for a local door lock release pushbutton

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.1-18

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

ENTRANCE PANEL IP54 IK07

LINEA 300

308001 308002 308003 308004 308022

308011 308012 308013 308014

Pack Item Aluminium finish pushbutton panel Pack Item Stainless steel finish pushbutton panel
1 308001 Monobloc vandal-resistant 2 WIRE video 1 308011 Monobloc vandal-resistant 2 WIRE video
pushbutton panel for 2 and 4 calls with aluminium pushbutton panel for 2 and 4 calls with
finish. The item code includes: flush mounted stainless steel finish. The item code includes:
box, frame, colour video and audio electronic flush mounted box, frame, colour video
module, prewired pushbutton module/s. and audio electronic module, prewired
Presetting for the mounting of transponder pushbutton module/s. Presetting for the
reader or key switch. Backlit call keys. Visual and mounting of transponder reader or key
sound notifications of the communication status switch. Backlit call keys. Visual and sound
for: call active, system busy, door lock status notifications of the communication status for:
1 308002 As item 30800 but for up to 8 calls call active, system busy, door lock status
1 308003 As item 308001 but for up to 12 calls
1 308012 As item 308011 but for up to 8 calls
1 308004 As item 308001 but for up to 20 calls
1 308013 As item 308011 but for up to 12 calls
1 308005 As item 308001 but for up to 32 calls
1 308014 As item 308011 but for up to 20 calls
1 308015 As item 308011 but for up to 32 calls
Wall mounted boxes
1 308021 Wall mounted box for pushbutton panels,
items 308001-308011
1 308022 Wall mounted box for pushbutton panels,
items 308002-308012
1 308023 Wall mounted box for pushbutton panels,
items 308003-308013
1 308024 Wall mounted box for pushbutton panels,
items 308004-308014
1 308025 Wall mounted box for pushbutton panels,
items 308005-308015

NOTA: (*) compatibilità con scatole da incasso 331120 - 331130

5.1-19
308040 308026

Pack Item Digital call entrance panel

1 308040 Monobloc vandal-resistant 2 WIRE digital call
video pushbutton panel (in stainless steel), flush
mounted or wall mounted installation (with
specific box item 308026 sold separately). The
item includes: flush mounted vandal-resistant
steel box, audio and video module with wide angle
colour camera, integrated graphic display, and
alphanumeric keypad for direct apartment call,
fast address book search, and door lock release
using a code. Presetting for the installation
of a T25 Vigik reader, or a key switch. Backlit
display and BLUE keys. It is possible to store
up to 4000 residents names. Visual, sound, or
control speech synthesis communication status
notification, for example: call active, system
busy, door lock status. Direct control of an
electric door lock 18V-4A impulsive, 250 mA
holding current (30 ohm max). System power
supply cuts do NOT cause the loss of memory
data. Selectable display menu languages are:
Italian, English and French.
The device can be configured physically or
using a PC with the specific software, which
can be downloaded free of charge from
www.homesystems-legrandgroup.com
1 308026 Wall mounted box for digital call
entrance panel 308040

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.1-20

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

INTERNAL UNITS
Overview and features

Classe 300EOS Classe Classe

with Netatmo 100X16E 100V16E

Scorri verso il basso per le impostazioni

Audio

Colour video

Handsfree

Call redirection
on smartphone

Integrated
Alexa voice assistant

Wifi connection

Finishes / Colours White White White

LCD Touch LCD LCD

Display
5" 5” 5”

Answering machine

Floor call

Door lock release

Staircase
light control

Scrolling
EP activation

Intercom (1)

Inductive loop (2)

Professional studio
function

Safe door lock

function

Note / message
function

Quick link / Favourite

Wall-mounted
installation

Tabletop installation

(1) The intercom function allows for up to 3-minute communication between and among video door entry systems in the same apartment / in different apartments.
(2) Use by people wearing hearing aids fitted with (T) selector.
(3) Activated with specific configuration inserted in P.

5.2-1
 Classe Classe Classe Classe Sprint L2
100V16B 100V16M 100A16E 100A16M

White White White White White

LCD LCD
5” 4,3"

(3)

(3)

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.2-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

INTERNAL UNITS
CLASSE 300EOS with Netatmo

LED notifications
Wi-Fi Connection
Device info
Ringtone exclusion

Alexa voice assistant controls

5” vertical touch screen Alexa speaker volume + / -
LCD display Alexa activation
Led + Alexa microphone exclusion

FAVOURITE control
Can be customised to activate
the most commonly used quick
functions e.g. intercom, staircase
External pushbutton lights and additional door locks
panel/camera scrolling
activation
Enable / disable the
handsfree communication Activation control of the external
with the external pushbutton panel door lock
pushbutton panel

Microphone

Back view

Speaker

Plug-in connectors with screw

clamps for connection
(BUS-MH) – BUS SCS MyHome Home
Automation system;
(5M-1) – additional ringtone; ON / OFF micro switch
( ) – call to the floor external pushbutton to enable the additional
power supply (2-1)
Dip-switch to enable
the safe door lock function
Line termination ON/OFF
micro-switch

Connector for the connection to

Dip-switch to select the the LAN network using Ethernet
MASTER / SLAVE function accessory 344844

Plug-in connector with screw clamps

for connection
Configurator socket (2-1) – Additional power supply;
(BUS-AV) – BUS SCS 2 wires video
MINI-USB socket door entry system
for firmware update

5.2-3
 H+S

344842 344844 346020

Pack Item  LASSE 300EOS WITH NETATMO

C Pack Item Ethernet accessory
connected video internal unit 1 344844 Accessory cable for the wired connection of the
1 344842 2 wires/Wi-Fi handsfree connected video internal Classe 300EOS video internal unit using an RJ45
unit with built-in Amazon Alexa voice assistant, Ethernet cable. To be purchased separately.
5” vertical touch screen LCD display and video
door entry answering machine. It has a physical
key for door lock release and capacitive keys 2 DIN additional power supply
for the control of the main video door entry 1 346020 Additional 2 DIN power supply to be used to
functions: handsfree communication, entrance supply the connected CLASSE 300EOS video
panel activation /camera scrolling and Favourite internal unit (344842) locally, when required.
key (can be configured to activate the quick
actions most frequently used – e.g. additional
door locks, staircase light control, intercom).
There are notification LEDs for: Wi-
Fi network connection status, info /
notifications and call exclusion.
It is possible to easily interact with the built-in
Alexa voice assistant, either using the dedicated
capacitive keys or with your voice, and activate
several functions, such as the video door entry
functions, Smart Home, scenarios, reminders etc.
Using the touch display, it is possible to access
the notification list, as well as your favourite
door entry, security and Smart Home controls
(if any). Possibility of voice communication with
the switchboard - if present in the system - after
a specific call. The device must be configured by
physically connecting the configurators, or using
the menu, which will give better possibilities of
customisation of associated functions and texts.
Thanks to the Wi-Fi connection, you can associate
the video internal unit to the Home + Security App
(available for Android and iOS). The App allows
to use the main video internal unit functions
(receiving calls, door lock release, display of
the event timeline and activation of the entrance
panel/camera cycling). Through the Home +
Security App, it is also possible to manage
the products of the Netatmo security range
(outdoor and indoor cameras, door and window
sensors, indoor siren and smoke detector).
This allows you to quickly and easily create a
Smart security system. The device also allows
to create and manage Smart Home functions,
using the wired SCS BUS solution or the
Zigbee solution, without the need for adding
dedicated gateways. Wall mounted installation
using the supplied bracket Possibility of Wi-
Fi connection or using RJ45 ethernet cable
with the dedicated accessory 344844.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.2-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

NETATMO PRODUCTS
Smart Security devices

Home + Security App

NOC - PRO NOC -S- PRO NSC - PRO NBU - AS - PRO DTG - PRO

Pack Item Smart outdoor camera Pack Item Smart indoor camera
1 NOC- Smart outdoor safety camera with detection 1 NSC- Smart indoor safety camera with people detection
PRO of people, animals and vehicles. PRO consisting of an aluminium monobloc unit.
Aluminium single monobloc construction. Video sensor: 4MP. 130° panoramic
Ultra-resistant glass and plastic, view for a wider coverage.
protection against UV rays. High quality video with Full HD 1080 p viewing.
Video sensor: 4MP. Resolution: Full HD 1080 p. Guaranteed day and night protection with
Coding: H.264. Long-range detection: up infrared vision, for comfortable viewing even
to 20 m. Field of view: 100°. 8x digital zoon in total darkness. Recording only in case
for videos. Video live microphone. of intrusion, in respect of the privacy of the
LED spotlight: 12 W, variable intensity. family. Encryption protected access to the
Infrared night vision: 15 m. smartphone using the Home + Security App.
Encryption protected access to the smartphone Declaration of conformity and FCC
using the Home + Security App. declarations. Open-source compatibility.
Weather resistant: designed for It has to be connected to an electric
outdoor use (HZO protection). socket with the supplied AC adapter.

Smart outdoor camera with siren Smart video alarm system

1 NOC-S- Smart outdoor safety camera with 1 NBU- Smart video security alarm system consisting
PRO detection of people, animals and vehicles. AS-PRO of 1 smart indoor camera, 1 smart indoor
Equipped with 105 db alarm siren. siren and 3 smart door and window opening
Aluminium single monobloc construction. sensors. The products can be easily configured
Ultra-resistant glass and plastic, and associated using the Home + Security
protection against UV rays. app. The smart video alarm system activates
Video sensor: 4MP. Resolution: Full HD 1080 p. and deactivates automatically, has pre-
Coding: H.264. Long-range detection: up recorded sounds to simulate a presence in the
to 20 m. Field of view: 100°. 8x digital zoon home, respects the privacy of the family and
for videos. Video live microphone. activates a 110 dB sound in case of intrusion.
LED spotlight: 12 W, variable intensity.
Infrared night vision: 15 m. Smart door and window sensors
Encryption protected access to the smartphone
using the Home + Security App.
1 DTG- Smart opening sensors for doors and windows
PRO ideal for safety. Sensors with waterproof
Weather resistant: designed for monobloc construction, vibration/motion
outdoor use (HZO protection). detection and open/closed status. Power
supply with 2 AAA-type batteries included
in the package. They only work with the
smart indoor camera (sold separately): radio
link between the sensors and the camera.
Declaration of conformity and FCC. Open-
source compatibility. Can be controlled and
managed remotely with Home + Security app.

5.2-2
NDB - PRO NSA - PRO - EU NIS - 01 - PRO NCO - PRO

Pack Item Smart video doorbell Pack Item Smart indoor siren
1 NDB- Smart video doorbell for outdoor installation. 1 NIS-01- Smart indoor siren with 110 dB alarm, pre-
PRO Allows you to receive a video call on your PRO recorded sounds and vibration sensor for tamper
smartphone when someone rings the detection. Battery power supply or with a cable
doorbell. Equipped with Camera: (not supplied) using the USB micro port.
2 megapixels, 5x digital zoom. HDR function It only works with the smart indoor camera and
of automatic adaptation to lighting conditions. must be installed in the same room: Bluetooth
Infrared night vision even in conditions of Low Energy (BLE) wireless connection with the
total absence of brightness. Video: Full HD smart indoor camera. Declaration of conformity
1080 p, portrait format 9:16. Field of view: and FCC declarations. Open-source compatibility.
140° diagonal. Sound: high-quality speaker Operation using the Home + Security app.
and microphone. Night vision: Infrared LED.
Operating temperature: -10° to 40° C. Weather Smart carbon monoxide alarm
resistant: HZO protection and IP44 certification.
Power supply: 8-24 VAC & 230 VAC; minimum 1 NCO- Smart carbon monoxide alarm / detector for wall
8 VA. Local storage on microSD memory card PRO installation. It allows to monitor the fuel-burning
and optional storage on Dropbox or FTP server appliances (boiler, fireplace, wood-burning stove,
MicroSD card up to 32 GB (class 10). Data gas cooker, etc.) by measuring, in real time,
protection with encrypted connection for the the levels of carbon monoxide, which is an
highest level of privacy. Requirements: high invisible, odourless and potentially fatal
speed internet access. The minimum required gas. When it detects the presence of carbon
upload and download speed is 25 KB/s. Hotspots monoxide, it activates its 85-decibel alarm and
are not supported. Wireless specifications: Wi-Fi immediately alerts you to your smartphone.
802.11 b/g/n (2.4 GHz), Open/WEP/WPA/WPA2- It is equipped with a 10-year battery
personal. Operation via Home + Security app - the maximum lifetime for all
(iOS 10 required minimum - Android 5.0 required carbon monoxide detectors.
minimum). Compatible with Apple HomeKit, The Self-Test feature checks if the Smart Carbon
Google Assistant and Amazon Alexa.www Monoxide Alarm is functioning correctly.
If it detects a problem, it sends a
Smart smoke alarm notification to your smartphone. Reliability
guaranteed by CE (EN 50291)
1 NSA- Smart Smoke Alarm with 85 dB alarm, high and NF certifications. Standalone device, no hub
PRO-EU performance photoelectric sensor, average required. Compatible with Apple HomeKit.
coverage 50 m². When it detects the presence Operation via the Home + Security app.
of smoke, it activates its 85-decibel alarm and Requirements: High-speed wireless
immediately alerts you to your smartphone. internet connection needed.
It is equipped with a 10-year battery - the Public hotspots not supported. The Smart
maximum lifetime for all smoke detectors. Carbon Monoxide Alarm will detect Carbon
The Self-Test feature checks if the Smart Monoxide and will sound even if the Wi-Fi
Smoke Alarm is functioning correctly. isn’t configured. However, you will need Wi-
If it detects a problem, it sends a Fi to receive smartphone alerts. Wi-Fi 802.11
notification to your smartphone. Reliability b/g/n (2.4 GHz), Open/WEP/WPA/WPA2-
guaranteed by CE (EN 14604) Personal, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE).
and NF certifications. Standalone device,
no hub required. Compatible with Apple
HomeKit. Operation via the Home + Security
app. Requirements: High-speed wireless
internet connection needed. Public hotspots
not supported. The Smart Smoke Alarm will
detect smoke and will sound even if the Wi-Fi
isn’t configured. However, you will need Wi-
Fi to receive smartphone alerts. Wi-Fi 802.11
b/g/n (2.4 GHz), Open/WEP/WPA/ WPA2-
Personal, Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE).

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.2-3

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

INTERNAL UNITS
CLASSE 100
Features and functions
Classe 100 Classe 100 Classe 100 Classe 100 Classe 100 Classe 100
X16E V16E V16B V16M A16E A16M

344682 344672 344652 344625 344282 344292

FEATURES

LCD colour display 5 inches 5 inches 5 inches 4.3 inches

Handsfree
Finish white white white white white white
Available in KIT 364614 364612 364613 364232 364231
Installation wall / table wall / table wall / table wall wall / table wall / table

AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS FROM AUDIO / VIDEO INDOOR UNIT

Door lock activation

Staircase light
activation
EP / Scrolling activation
Intercom (1)
Inductive loop (2)
Floor call
No. of configurable keys 4 4 1 1 4 4
No. of available 20 16 16 16 16 16
ringtones
Professional Studio
(Office)
Wi-Fi connectivity

AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS FROM DOOR ENTRY APP

Answer video door entry
system calls
Door lock activation
Staircase light activation
Intercom call from
smartphone to video indoor
unit
Netatmo Smart cameras
interoperability

EP / Scrolling activation

1) Audio call, max. 3 minutes, between indoor units of the same apartment/different apartments
2) Use by people wearing hearing aids fitted with T selector

5.2-4
Front view

Touch sensitive
controls

Door lock activation

Entrance panel/camera
scrolling activation

Staircase light activation

LED notifications

Customisable controls for

the activation of accessory Wi-Fi Connection
functions (e.g. intercom,
activation of additional
door lock, various
activations) Ringtone exclusion

Physical control Physical control

Enable the handsfree Disable the handsfree
communication Tactile guide communication

Rear view

Plug-in connectors USB mini socket for

with screw clamps firmware update
for connections

Adjustment and
programming
menu access and
navigation joystick
ON / OFF micro
switch to enable
Line termination ON/ the Safe Door Lock
OFF micro-switch function

ON / OFF micro
switch to enable the
additional power
supply Configurator socket

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.2-5

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

INTERNAL UNITS
CLASSE 100

344682 344672 344652 344625

Door Entry
CLASSE 100X App
See note (*)

Pack Item CLASSE 100X16E connected video indoor Pack Item CLASSE 100V16B video indoor unit
unit 1 344652 2 WIRES handsfree video indoor unit with 5"
1 344682 2 WIRES/Wi-Fi handsfree connected video indoor colour LCD display. The device has 2 physical
unit with inductive loop and 5" colour LCD display keys for the control of the main video door
It has 2 physical keys for the control of the entry functions – answer and end a call – and
main video door entry functions – answer 3 touch keys that allow the door lock release,
and end a call – it has 3 touch keys for the the entrance panel activation/scrolling and
control of the main functions – door lock the customisation of a most frequently used
release, staircase light control and entrance quick action – e.g. staircase light control,
panel activation/scrolling – there are further intercom, additional door lock activation,
4 configurable touch keys that perform generic activations. The device has a side
different functions – e.g. intercom, additional lever to adjust: colour, brightness and display
door lock activation, generic activations. contrast, audio and call tone volume.
The device has a side lever to adjust: colour, There is a call exclusion notification LED.
brightness and display contrast, audio volume, The installation can be made to the wall using
call tone volume and Wi-Fi configuration. the bracket (supplied) or using table support
There are call exclusion notification LEDs and accessories (2 x 344692) – to be purchased
Wi-Fi. Also, thanks to the Wi-Fi connection, you separately. The device must be configured.
can associate the video indoor unit to the Door
Entry App (available for Android and iOS). CLASSE 100V16M video indoor unit
You can manage the main video indoor unit 1 344625 2 WIRES video indoor unit with handset and 4.3”
functions (receiving calls, opening the door colour LCD display, suitable for wall mounting
lock, activating the entrance panel/scrolling, installation (bracket support included). The
firmware updating and additional activations) device has three touch keys that allows :
from the App. Netatmo Smart Outdoor & door lock release, entrance panel camera
Smart Indoor cameras interoperability. activation/scrolling and customization of an
The installation can be made to the wall auxiliary function – e.g. additional door lock
using the bracket (supplied) or using activation, additional camera activation.
table support accessories (2 x 344692) Side easily accessible and independent
– to be purchased separately. regulations for : call volume / ringtone
The device also has Professional Studio exclusion (with notification LED),
(Office) function and must be configured. display colour and brightness. The
handset has magnets for easy holding.
CLASSE 100V16E video indoor unit
1 344672 2 WIRES handsfree video indoor unit , with
inductive loop and 5" colour LCD display It NOTE (*):
has 2 physical keys for the control of the in the course of 2022, the Door Entry Classe 100X
main video door entry functions – answer
and end a call – it has 3 touch keys for the App will migrate to the new Home + Security App.
control of the main functions – door lock
release, staircase light control and entrance
panel activation/scrolling – there are further
4 configurable touch keys that perform
different functions – e.g. intercom, additional
door lock activation, generic activations.
The video indoor unit has a side lever to adjust:
colour, brightness and display contrast,
audio and call tone volume. There is a call
exclusion notification LED. The installation
can be made to the wall using the bracket
(supplied) or using table support accessories
(2 x 344692) – to be purchased separately.
The device also has Professional Studio
(Office) function and must be configured.

5.2-6
344282 344292 344692 336803 336982 346020

Pack Item CLASSE 100A16E HANDSFREE audio indoor Pack Item Accessories - table support - cable -
unit sockets
1 344282 2 WIRES handsfree audio indoor unit for 1 344692 Table support accessory for CLASSE 100 audio
wall mounted or table installation. and video indoor units.
It has 2 physical keys for the control of the main
functions – answer and end a call – and has 3
1 336803 8-way cable with connector for tabletop support
touch keys for the control of the main functions connection.
– door lock release, staircase light control and 1 336982 White Livinglight series 8-pole plug for the
entrance panel activation/scrolling – there are connection of the 336803 cable in tabletop
further 4 configurable touch keys that perform installations.
different functions – e.g. intercom, additional
door lock activation, generic activations. The The socket is available also in the following
device has a side lever to adjust the audio volume finishings:
and call tone and a call exclusion notification LED. - LIVINGLIGHT (336983 - 336984);
The installation can be made to the wall using - AXOLUTE (349414 - 349415 - 349418);
the bracket (supplied) or using table support - MATIX (336985).
accessory (1 x 344692) – to be purchased
separately. The device also has Professional 2 DIN additional power supply
Studio (Office) function and must be configured. 1 346020 Additional 2 DIN power supply to be used
for the local power supply to connected
CLASSE 100A16M audio indoor unit with CLASSE 100x16E (344682) video indoor
handset units in multi-family systems in complexes
1 344292 2 WIRES audio indoor unit with handset for wall with more than 22 apartments.
mounted or table installation. It has 3 touch
keys for the control of the main functions –
door lock release, staircase light control and
entrance panel activation/scrolling – there
are further 4 configurable touch keys that
perform different functions – e.g. intercom,
additional door lock activation, generic
activations. Ringtone volume adjustment (with
call exclusion) using the appropriate selector.
The installation can be made to the wall using
the bracket (supplied) or using table support
accessory (1 x 344692) – to be purchased
separately. The device also has Professional
Studio (Office) function and must be configured.

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.2-7

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

INTERNAL UNITS
SPRINT L2

1 Simple and modern design

2

344242 344232

Pack Item SPRINT L2 audio handsets

1 344242 2 WIRE audio handset (without the possibility 3
of fitting with accessories) for audio systems
and mixed audio /video systems. Wall mounted
installation without the need of accessories.
With door lock release key and auxiliary
functions key (that can be configured). Ringtone 2 Ringtone volume,
volume adjustable on 3 levels. White adjustable to 3 levels
1 344232 As item 344242 but with call to the floor function

3 Two pushbuttons:
- door lock release
- available for applications
(e.g. control of staircase lights)

DIMENSIONAL DATA
78 54,5
194

344232
Size in mm

5.2-8
Guard Station and Software
switchboard

346310 346300

Pack Item Guard station and accessories Pack Item SOFTSWITCHBOARD software
1 346310 Guard station for 2 WIRE audio and video 1 346300 Switchboard software for the management
systems. Allows access to various services of audio and video door entry system calls.
(video door entry functions, door lock/ The software (Windows operating system
staircase light management and apartment compatible) can be installed on any desktop
alarm monitoring) directly from the keypad or laptop PC, and gives the possibility of
or via the intuitive icon menu. The receiving, managing and transferring the
guard station is supplied with an integrated calls from the entrance panel and the
table supporting frame and also features handset. It implements home video
a 7” colour LCD display, receiver and speaker monitoring, with cyclical display of the cameras,
phone, dedicated keys for the main night and day functions, and the possibility of
functions and keys which can be configured. displaying the alarms in the various apartments.
The programming can be carried out - Supported operating systems:
directly from the device or via PC with Microsoft Windows XP Service
TiSwitchBoardDevice software (supplied). The Pack 2, Windows Vista and Windows 7.
device can manage the phonics of the riser - Software required:
EP (i.e. wired downstream of interface NET Framework 3.5 or higher
346851); it cannot however manage the
apartment EP (i.e. wired downstream of
interface 346850). The use of an additional
power supply is recommended.
It is possible to connect up to a max. of 16
switchboards (configured from 0 to 15).
WARNING: the guard station cannot be used
in systems with 2 WIRE-IP interface
346890. The new HIERARCHICAL mode is
available only with the entrance panels
of the following series: Sfera
New, Linea 100, Linea 300.
1 336982 White 8-way socket for table top installation
of guard station item 346310
1 336803 8 – Way cable with connector for the
table top installation connection.

Alarm reception and

management

Entrance panel call

Camera reception
enabling

Staircase light
K

switching on
A
CL

Door lock release

Intercom
calls

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.2-9

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
Accessories

346050 ¬ SELV 346030 ¬ SELV F441 346850 346851

346040 ¬ SELV 346020 ¬ SELV F441M

Pack Item Power supplies Pack Item Video mixers

1 346050 Power supply for 2 WIRES system in 6 DIN 1 F441 Audio video node in 6-DIN modular enclosure
modular enclosure. Power supply 110 – 240 Vac set up with 4 input terminals and 4 output
@ 50 – 60 Hz. The output provides two power terminals. Can connect up to 4 source devices
supplies in very low safety voltage (one (entrance panels or cameras) in input and
on the 3 TK BUS, IU BUS and SCS clamps, one up to 4 2-WIRES video risers in output.
on the 1 - 2 clamp) to be used alternately The device must be used with the system
and NOT at the same time. To be used in audio, power supply 346000. It must be used as an
video or mixed audio video systems. The video alternative to the audio video adapter 346830
adapter is integrated in the device (item 346830
must not be used). It is therefore possible to 1 F441M Multi-channel matrix in 10 DIN modular
avoid the use of the A/V node (F441) or the Multi- enclosure. Set up for the connection of video
channel Matrix (F441M), if three junctions (MAX entry system entrance panels, cameras and
2 IU + 1 TK risers or 1 IU + MAX 2 TK risers) sound system sources in input and internal
are not exceeded in total from the clamps. units and amplifiers in output. 4 inputs are
It can also be used as additional power supply dedicated to entrance panels/cameras and 4
(1 - 2 output) for the local power supply of the to the sound system sources. It can be used to
preset internal units or entrance panels (in this create multi-channel sound systems. The device
case it is not possible to use other outputs). must be used with the system power supply
The device is electronically protected against 346000. In the systems it replaces the video
overload and short circuit. It is a SELV double adapter 346830 and the audio video node F441
insulation safety device. The installation
must be made in compliance with current
regulations. The device must not be configured. System interfaces
WARNING: the (IU BUS), (TK BUS) and (SCS) 1 346850 Apartment interface in 4 DIN modular enclosure.
outputs can be used at the same time Can interface a dedicated apartment video door
respecting the total maximum system with local CCTV, sound system and
absorption of 1.2 A. control of the Home automation applications
WARNING: Disconnect the power supply for to a 2-WIRES riser. The device must be
5 minutes after overload or short circuit. configured using physical configurators
346040 Power supply for 2 WIRES audio systems in 6
1 346851 System expansion interface in 4 DIN modular
1 enclosure. Can double the length of the entrance
DIN modular enclosure. Power supply 110 – 240
Vac @ 50-60 Hz. The output provides 26 Vdc low panel-internal unit line, create risers with
rated voltage, and a maximum rated current independent sound and expand the performance
of 600 mA and it is protected on the PRI side of the apartment system. The device must be
(with fuse) against overload and short circuit. configured using physical configurators
It is a SELV double insulation safety device.
1 346030 Mini power supply with integrated video adapter
to make small 2-WIRES video systems (intercom).
2 DIN modular enclosure. Power supply 230
Vac @ 50-60 Hz. The output provides 27 Vdc
continuous low voltage, with maximum current
of 600 mA and it is protected on the PRI side
(with fuse) against overload and short circuit.
It is a SELV double insulation safety device.
1 346020 Additional power supply to be used to supply
the set up entrance panels and internal units
locally. 2 DIN modular enclosure. Power supply
230 Vac @ 50-60 Hz. The output provides 27 Vdc
continuous low voltage, with maximum current
of 600 mA and it is protected on the PRI side
(with fuse) against overload and short circuit.
It is a SELV double insulation safety device.

5.3-1
346891 346260 346210 346841 347400 346870

346993 346250 3499 354000

Pack Item Interfaces with other BTicino systems Pack Item Devices in basic enclosure
1 346891 Can make very large mixed 2 WIRES/IP systems 1 346841 Floor shunt with 4 outputs Can make 2-WIRES
with a large number of devices, thanks to the video door entry systems with star wiring
creation of an IP backbone with 2-WIRES risers. distribution. The device automatically adapts
The device must be configured using the video signal. Its small size means it can
physical configurators or using the software also be placed inside the flush-mounted box
1 346150 8/2-WIRES interface in 6 DIN modular 1 346833 Call to the floor interface. By connecting a
enclosure. Can make mixed video door traditional pushbutton, the following functions
entry systems (8-WIRES digital backbone/2- will be possible: general call to the floor,
WIRES risers). The device must be addressed call to the floor, staircase lights
configured using physical configurators on, and door lock release (specific actuator
1 349410 Analogue/2 WIRES interface in 4 DIN modular needed) and association of the video image
enclosure. Can interface a dedicated apartment to the call to the floor. The device must be
2-WIRE video door entry system with cameras configured using physical configurators
and control of the MyHOME applications to an 1 347400 Interface for the conversion of the coaxial signal
analogue riser, digital 8-WIRES, into a 2 WIRES BUS signal. It can be used to
audio TERSYSTEM and VIDEOPORTER 2000. connect to the BUS of the 2 WIRES video door
entry system a camera with coaxial video output
DIN actuators powered at 12 Vdc, with maximum absorption
150 mA and 1 Vpp video output (75 Ω). The device
1 346210 Relay actuator in 2 DIN modular enclosure. Can must be configured using physical configurators
switch on lights, open gates, repeat the call on
bells (MOD=SLA) or control other devices from Wiring accessories
the video internal units. The device must be
configured using physical configurators 1 346870 2 WIRES video amplifier. In video systems
wired using non-twisted wires, where the
1 346230 Door lock relay actuator in 2 DIN modular distance between the entrance panels and the
enclosure. Can supply power and activate internal unit exceeds 50 metres, it enables
an electrical door lock. increasing such distance to up to 100 metres
The device must be configured
using physical configurators 1 346250 Relay module for gate opening to be used with
LINEA 2000, LINEA 3000, MINISFERA and SFERA
1 346260 Timed door lock relay actuator in 4 DIN modular pushbutton panels. Can open door locks (NOT
enclosure. Can switch on lights,
open gates or manage electro-magnetic managed by BUS) by means of the entrance panel
door locks, timed door opening and
door lock status (with NC contact). 5 3499 Line terminator. To be used to terminate the
The device must be configured riser or apartment line, when the last installed
using physical configurators device is not tted with line closing micro switch
1 354000 Flat cable for the connection of several
SFERA NEW and SFERA ROBUR
pushbutton modules. Length 470 mm

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.3-2

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
Accessories

346991 336904 3515 3501/1 3501K

336905

Pack Item Universal speaker unit and expansion module Pack Item Configurators (package of 10 pieces)
1 346991 The universal speaker unit can be used to 10 3501/0 Configurator 0
install the 2 WIRES audio system in new or
refurbished systems, where pushbutton 10 3501/1 Configurator 1
panels of other manufacturers are present 10 3501/2 Configurator 2
or required (mail boxes, patterned brass, 10 3501/3 Configurator 3
compact sheet metal units, etc.), preset for
a traditional speaker module (e.g. 2659N). 10 3501/4 Configurator 4
The universal speaker unit has, as base, 10 3501/5 Configurator 5
contacts for the connection of 8 call keys; to
make systems with more keys (up to 56 using
10 3501/6 Configurator 6
the 346000 power supply and up to 24 with the 10 3501/7 Configurator 7
346010 power supply one or more key expension 10 3501/8 Configurator 8
modules must be used (1 every 8 pushbuttons). 10 3501/9 Configurator 9
1 346992 Expansion module for connecting more than 10 3501/ Configurator JMP
8 call keys to item 346991 - max. 6 modules
(56 calls max.) with power supply 346000. JMP
Max. 2 modules (24 calls max.) Configurator kit
with power supply 346010
1 3501K Configurator kit consisting of:
Cable for systems - 10 pieces for each type of configurator from 0 to 9
- 2 blue removable 8-clamp connectors
1 336904 Specific cable for 2 WIRES video door entry - 2 green removable 2-clamp connectors
applications with 2 twisted conductors. It can be - 1 configurator connection tool (3502)
installed in underground piping, in accordance - 1 plastic screwdriver
with standards (CEI 20-13 and CEI 20-14). It
ensures the best performance in video systems
(higher distance between EP and Handset when
compared with other cables). 200 m coil
1 336905 Specific cable for BUS / SCS unshielded,
consisting of a white outer sheath and 2 flexible
conductors twisted together with a cross section
of 0.50 mm2. Halogen-free low-toxicity cable;
ideal for applications in environments where
greater regard is required for safety in the
event of fire (halogen free). 400 V insulation.
Compliant with standards: EN 50575 EN60811,
EN50289, EN50290, EN60228, 50265-2-1,
EN50395, EN50396. Cable not suitable for
burial. Coil length 200 m. Fire reaction class
according to CPR regulation: Ccas1b, d1, a1.
Spare part terminal/clamp
1 3515 Spare part terminal/clamp for BUS
connection of the predisposed devices

5.3-3
PROFESSIONAL KITS
Villa Connected Video Kits

H+S

363950

Note: Packaging graphics are subject to changes / updates.

200 m.
REC
max
WIRES
wi-fi

5”
+4 touch intercom
IK10 IP54 +1

Pack Item CLASSE 300EOS - LINEA 3000 - NETATMO

SMART OUTDOOR CAMERA CONNECTED KIT
One-family kit with Classe 300EOS handsfree
connected video internal unit, LINEA 3000
pushbutton panel in black finish and Netatmo Smart
Outdoor Camera.
2 wires/Wi-Fi handsfree connected video internal
unit with Teleloop, built-in Amazon Alexa voice
assistant, 5” vertical touch screen LCD display
and video door entry answering machine. Easy
interaction with the built-in Alexa voice assistant,
either using the dedicated capacitive keys or with
your voice, and activate several functions, such
as the video door entry functions, Smart Home,
scenarios, reminders etc. Thanks to the Wi-Fi
connectivity, you can associate the video internal
unit to the Home + Security App (available for
Android and iOS).
The App allows to use the main video internal HOME + SECURITY is the App that allows, through the smartphone, to
unit functions (receiving calls, door lock release, manage calls locally and remotely of the video door phone or with a simple
display of the event timeline and activation of the touch to open the gate, the activation of the cameras, and switching on of
entrance panel/camera cycling). With the Home the timed lights in the garden. Allows you to activate and view images of
+ Security App, it is also possible to manage the Netatmo Smart Outdoor and Indoor Cameras. Setting up the App requires
products of Netatmo security range (outdoor and a few steps and thanks to the BTicino Cloud, the remote connection is fully
indoor cameras, door and window sensors, indoor automated and managed with the highest level of security.
siren, smoke detector). This allows you to quickly
and easily create a Smart security system. The
device also allows to create and manage Smart
Home functions, using the wired SCS BUS solution
or the Zigbee solution, without the need for adding Item KIT COMPOSITION Qty
dedicated gateways. 343093 LINEA 3000 pushbutton panel 1
LINEA 3000 pushbutton panel with black
finish zamak front cover, wide angle colour camera 344842 CLASSE 300EOS video internal unit 1
and proximity reader and with a kit of coloured key NOC-PRO Smart Outdoor Camera 1
cards and two clear discs for door lock release. Can
be wall or flush installed with specific accessories: 346050 6 DIN SCS power supply 1
(350020) flush mounted box and (343063) flush 346250 Door lock relay accessory 1
mounted accessory - to be purchased separately.
Can be fitted with rainshield (343053) - to be 348260 Set of coloured door lock release key cards 1
purchased separately. The pushbutton panel has 348261 Set of door lock release clear discs 1
a protection index IP54- protection index against
mechanical impact IK10.
Smart Outdoor Security Camera with LED lighting
spotlight, night vision and motion detection – send
real time notification on smartphone in case of
unknown person or vehicle detection.
1 363950 Complete one family kit
(Easy switch to two families system by purchasing
an additional internal unit - refer to 2 Wires system
internal units range).

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.4-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

PROFESSIONAL KITS
Villa Connected Video Kits

H+S

363915

200 m.
REC
max
WIRES
wi-fi

5”
+4 touch intercom
IK10 IP54 +1

Pack Item CLASSE 300EOS WITH NETATMO – LINEA 3000

CONNECTED VIDEO KIT
One-family kit with Classe 300EOS handsfree
connected video internal unit and LINEA 3000
pushbutton panel in black finish.
2 wires/Wi-Fi handsfree connected video internal
unit with built-in Amazon Alexa voice assistant, 5”
vertical touch screen LCD display and video door
entry answering machine. Easy interaction with
the built-in Alexa voice assistant, either using the
dedicated capacitive keys or with your voice, and
activate several functions, such as the video door
entry functions, Smart Home, scenarios, reminders
etc. Thanks to the Wi-Fi connectivity, you can
associate the video internal unit to the Home +
Security App (available for Android and iOS).
The App allows to use the main video internal
unit functions (receiving calls, door lock release,
display of the event timeline and activation of the HOME + SECURITY is the App that allows, through the smartphone, to
entrance panel/camera cycling). With the Home manage calls locally and remotely of the video door phone or with a simple
+ Security App, it is also possible to manage the touch to open the gate, the activation of the cameras, and switching on of
products of Netatmo security range (outdoor and the timed lights in the garden. Allows you to activate and view images of
indoor cameras, door and window sensors, indoor Netatmo Smart Outdoor and Indoor Cameras. Setting up the App requires
siren, smoke detector). This allows you to quickly a few steps and thanks to the BTicino Cloud, the remote connection is fully
and easily create a Smart security system. The automated and managed with the highest level of security.
device also allows to create and manage Smart
Home functions, using the wired SCS BUS solution
or the Zigbee solution, without the need for adding
dedicated gateways.
LINEA 3000 pushbutton panel with black Item KIT COMPOSITION Qty
finish zamak front cover, wide angle colour camera 343093 LINEA 3000 pushbutton panel 1
and proximity reader and with a kit of coloured key
cards and two clear discs for door lock release. Can 344842 CLASSE 300EOS video internal unit 1
be wall or flush installed with specific accessories: 346050 6 DIN SCS power supply 1
(350020) flush mounted box and (343063) flush
mounted accessory - to be purchased separately. 346250 Door lock relay accessory 1
Can be fitted with rainshield (343053) - to be 348260 Set of coloured door lock release key cards 1
purchased separately. The pushbutton panel has
a protection index IP54- protection index against 348261 Set of door lock release clear discs 1
mechanical impact IK10.

1 363915 Complete one family kit

(Easy switch to two families system by purchasing
an additional internal unit - refer to 2 Wires system
internal units range).

5.4-2
364614

WIRES
wi-fi IK10 IP54

200 m. 5”
max +4
intercom +1

Pack Item CLASSE 100X16E - LINEA 3000 CONNECTED

VIDEO KIT
One-family handsfree kit with: CLASSE 100X16E
Wi-Fi connected video indoor unit, handsfree
function, inductive loop, 5» LCD display; LINEA
3000 pushbutton panel with with zamak front
cover, wide angle colour camera, proximity reader
and with a set of coloured key cards and two clear
discs for door lock release. Can be configured for
one-family and two-family installations. It can
manage a maximum of 20 key cards (125 KHz)
for the electric door lock release (including the
one for the system management). Nameplate lit
by white LED. Can be wall or flush installed with
specific accessories: (350020) flush mounted
box and (343061) flush mounted accessory - to
be purchased separately. Can be fitted with
rainshield (343051)- to be purchased separately.
The pushbutton panel has a protection index IP54- DOOR ENTRY CLASSE 100X is the App which lets you, using your
protection index against mechanical impact IK10. smartphone,manage the video internal unit calls locally and remotely or
The video indoor unit has inductive loop function with a simple touch open the gate, activate the cameras and switch the
(to enable use by people wearing hearing aids garden timed lights on. Configuring the App needs just a few steps and,
fitted with T selector). It has 2 physical keys for the thanks to the BTicino Cloud, the remote connection is totally automated
control of the main functions – answer and end a and managed with the maximum level of security.
call – and has 3 touch keys for the control of the
main functions – door lock release, staircase light
control and entrance panel activation/scrolling
– there are further 4 configurable touch keys ATTENTION:
that perform different functions – e.g. intercom, the DOOR ENTRY CLASSE 100X app will migrate to
additional door lock activation, generic activations.
It has a side lever to adjust: the new HOME + SECURITY app in the year 2022.
colour, brightness and display contrast, audio
volume, call tone volume and Wi-Fi configuration.
There are call exclusion notification LEDs and Wi-
Fi. Also, thanks to the Wi-Fi connection, you can
associate the video indoor unit to the Door Entry
App (available for Android and iOS). You can manage
the main video indoor unit functions (receiving
calls, opening the door lock, activating the entrance
panel/scrolling, firmware updating and additional
activations) from the App. Item KIT COMPOSITION Qty
The installation can be made to the wall using the
bracket supplied or using table support accessories 343091 LINEA 3000 Entrance panel 1
(2 x 344692) – to be purchased separately. The 344682 CLASSE 100X16E Video internal unit 1
device also has Professional Studio (Office) function
and must be configured. 346050 6 DIN System power supply 1
1 364614 Complete one family kit 346250 Relay module accessory 1
(Easy switch to two families system by purchasing 348260 Set of door lock release badges 1
an additional internal unit - refer to 2 Wires system 348261 Set of door lock release clear discs 1
internal units range).
2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.4-3
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

PROFESSIONAL KITS
Villa Video Kits

364612

WIRES IK10 IP54

200 m. 5”
max +4
intercom +1

Pack Item CLASSE 100V16E - LINEA 3000 VIDEO KIT

One-family handsfree kit with CLASSE 100V16E
video indoor unit and LINEA 3000 pushbutton panel
with zamak front cover and wide angle colour
camera. Can be configured for one-family or two-
family installations. Nameplate lit by white LED. Can
be wall or flush installed with specific accessories:
(350020) flush mounted box with (343061) flush
mounted accessory - to be purchased separately.
Can be fitted with rainshield (343051) – to be
purchased separately.
The pushbutton panel has a protection index
IP54 - protection index against mechanical impact
IK10. The video indoor unit has 5” LCD display and
Inductive Loop function (to enable use by people
wearing hearing aids fitted with T selector). It
has 2 physical keys for the control of the main
functions – answer and end a call – and has 3 touch
keys for the control of the main functions – door
lock release, staircase light control and entrance
panel activation/scrolling – there are further 4
configurable touch keys that perform different
functions – e.g. intercom, additional door lock
activation, generic activations.
Wall mounted installation with the bracket supplied
or table installation with support accessories (2 x
344692) - to be purchased separately.
The device also has Professional Studio (Office)
function and must be configured.
1 364612 Complete one family kit
(Easy switch to two families system by purchasing
an additional internal unit - refer to 2 Wires system
internal units range).

Item KIT COMPOSITION Qty

343081 LINEA 3000 Entrance panel 1
344672 CLASSE 100V16E Video internal unit 1
346050 6 DIN System power supply 1
346250 Relay module accessory 1

5.4-4
364613 364622

WIRES WIRES
IK07 IP54 IK07 IP54

200 m. 5” 200 m. 5”
max +4 max +2
intercom +1 intercom +1

Pack Item CLASSE 100V16E - LINEA 2000 VIDEO KIT Pack Item CLASSE 100V16B - LINEA 2000 VIDEO KIT
1 364613 One-family handsfree video kit consisting of: 1 364622 Two-families handsfree video kit consisting
CLASSE 100V16B video indoor unit, LINEA 2000 of: CLASSE 100V16B video indoor units, LINEA
pushbutton panel with colour camera and 1 call 2000 pushbutton panel with colour camera and
pushbutton. 2 call pushbuttons. The push-button panel has a
The push-button panel has a protection index protection index against mechanical impact IK07
against mechanical impact IK07 and protection and protection index IP54.
index IP54. The video indoor units has 2 physical keys for the
The video indoor unit has 2 physical keys for the control of the main video door entry functions
control of the main video door entry functions – answer and end a call – and 3 touch keys that
– answer and end a call – and 3 touch keys that allow the door lock release, the entrance panel
allow the door lock release, the entrance panel activation/scrolling and the customization of a most
activation/scrolling and the customization of a most frequently used quick action – e.g. staircase light
frequently used quick action – e.g. staircase light control, intercom, additional door lock activation,
control, intercom, additional door lock activation, generic activations. The video indoor units has a 5”
generic activations. The video indoor unit has a 5” colour LCD display and a side lever to adjust: colour,
colour LCD display and a side lever to adjust: colour, brightness and display contrast, audio and call tone
brightness and display contrast, audio and call tone volume. There is a call exclusion notification LED.
volume. There is a call exclusion notification LED. Wall mounted installation with the bracket supplied
Wall mounted installation with the bracket supplied or table installation with support accessories (2 x
or table installation with support accessories (2 x 344692) - to be purchased separately.
344692) - to be purchased separately.

Item KIT COMPOSITION Qty Item KIT COMPOSITION Qty

343031 LINEA 2000 Entrance panel - 1 CALL 1 343032 LINEA 2000 Entrance panel - 2 CALLS 1
344652 CLASSE 100V16B Video internal unit 1 344652 CLASSE 100V16B Video internal unit 2
346050 6 DIN System power supply 1 346050 6 DIN System power supply 1
346250 Relay module accessory 1 346250 Relay module accessory 1

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.4-5

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

PROFESSIONAL KITS
Villa Audio Kits

364232 364231

1000 m. 1000 m.

WIRES
max
intercom +4 WIRES
max
intercom +4
IK10 IP54 +1 IK10 IP54 +1

Pack Item CLASSE 100A16E - LINEA 3000 HANDS FREE Pack Item CLASSE 100A16M - LINEA 3000 AUDIO KIT WITH
AUDIO KIT HAND SET
1 364232 One-family handsfree kit with CLASSE 100A16E 1 364231 One-family audio kit with CLASSE 100A16M audio
audio indoor unit and LINEA 3000 pushbutton panel indoor unit and LINEA 3000 pushbutton panel with
with zamak front cover. Can be configured for zamak front cover. Can be configured for one-family
one-family or two-family installations. Nameplate or two-family installations. Nameplate lit by white
lit by white LED. Can be wall or flush installed LED. Can be wall or flush installed with specific
with specific accessories: (350020) flush mounted accessories: (350020) flush mounted box with
box with (343061) flush mounted accessory - to be (343061) flush mounted accessory – to be purchased
purchased separately. Can be fitted with rainshield separately. Can be fitted with rainshield (343051)
(343051) – to be purchased separately. The – to be purchased separately. The pushbutton
pushbutton panel has a protection index IP54 – panel has a protection index IP54 – protection index
protection index against mechanical impact IK10. against mechanical impact IK10. The audio indoor
The indoor unit has 2 physical keys for the control unit has 3 touch keys for the control of the main
of the main door entry functions – answer and end functions – door lock release, staircase light control
a call – and has 3 touch keys for the control of the and entrance
main functions – door lock release, staircase light panel activation/scrolling – there are further 4
control and entrance panel activation/scrolling configurable touch keys that perform different
– there are further 4 configurable touch keys functions – e.g. intercom, additional door lock
that perform different functions – e.g. intercom, activation, generic activations. Ringtone volume
additional door lock activation, generic activations. adjustment (with call exclusion) using the
Ringtone volume adjustment (with call exclusion) appropriate selector. The installation can be made
using the appropriate selector. The installation to the wall using the bracket supplied or using table
can be made to the wall using the bracket supplied support accessory (1 x 344692) – to be purchased
or using table support accessory (1 x 344692) – to separately.
be purchased separately. The device also has The device also has Professional Studio (Office)
Professional Studio (Office) function and must be function and must be configured.
configured.

Item KIT COMPOSITION Qty Item KIT COMPOSITION Qty

343071 LINEA 3000 Audio entrance panel 1 343071 LINEA 3000 Audio entrance panel 1
344282 CLASSE 100A16E Audio internal unit 1 344292 CLASSE 100A16M Audio internal unit 1
346040 6 DIN System power supply 1 346040 6 DIN System power supply 1

5.4-6
366811 366821

1000 m.

WIRES
max +4
IK07 IP54

Pack Item SPRINT L2 – LINEA 2000 AUDIO Item KIT COMPOSITION 366811 366821
handset audio kit
Qty Qty
Audio kit with audio handset SPRINT L2 and LINEA
2000 pushbutton panel. 2 WIRE technology. The 342911 LINEA 2000 Entrance panel - 1 CALL 1 -
audio handset has a door lock release pushbutton 342921 LINEA 2000 Entrance panel - 2 CALLS - 1
and a pushbutton that can be configured for auxiliary
functions (staircase light switching on, entrance 344232 SPRINT L2 audio handset 1 2
panel activation, call to the switchboard). Devices 346040 6 DIN System power supply 1 1
suitable for wall mounted installation.
Expandable with additional audio handset 344242.
1 366811 Complete one-family kit
1 366821 Complete two-family kit

364211

Pack Item AUDIO HANDSFREE - LINEA 2000 Item KIT COMPOSITION Qty
1 364211 One-family expandable audio kit with audio 342911 LINEA 2000 Entrance panel - 1 CALL 1
handsfree internal unit and LINEA 2000 pushbutton 331650 Audio handsfree internal unit 1
panel. The audio internal unit can manage with (1 –
2) pushbuttons on board two independent contacts 346040 6 DIN System power supply 1
(24 Vac/dc – 1 A max.) Entrance panel and internal
unit are suitable for wall mounted installation.
Expansion possibility using the specific additional
handsfree internal unit 331650

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.4-7

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

GLOSSARY

AUTO-SWITCHING ON CONNECTED INTERNAL UNIT MASTER

Functions providing audio and video It is an internal unit which embeds a It is the video internal unit that turns
communication between internal unit wi-fi module able to connect to a wi-fi on when a call is received.
and entrance panel, or internal unit network.
and outside the door unit, without a RISER
call being received. ENTRANCE PANEL It is the set of vertical wiring
Term used to indicate the device connecting the internal units with the
BACKBONE outside the building, from which the power supply.
It provides the connection between internal unit can be called.
entrance panel and distributes the SLAVE
signal to. FLOOR CALL It is the video internal unit connected
Term used to indicate the call from an in parallel to the master video internal
CAT 5E AND CAT 6 CABLE out of the door bell. Usually referred to unit, and which rings but does not turn
Data transmission cables made up of an internal unit which has an additional on when a call is received (it only turns
four pairs arranged inside a sheath contact for a direct connection with an on when the call is answered).
according to a specific layout, which is out of the door door bell.
necessary to reduce attenuation and
crosstalk problems. This layout consists FLOOR SHUNT
of twisting the pairs of conductors Hub for the connection of video/
individually. These pairs are identified audio and audio only internal units,
using standard colours. Each of the apartment interfaces, and additional
pairs has a different pitch, and is in turn power supplies.
twisted differently inside the outer
sheath. IN / OUT
The conductor size permitted by the Connection of the devices where two
standards is between 22 and 26 AWG: clamps act as node between the IN
24 AWG is the most commonly used in twisted pair and the OUT twisted pair.
all cases and corresponds to a diameter
of 0.5 mm. INTERCOM
The acronym AWG (American Wire Function that provides audio
Gauge) corresponds to the unit of communication between two internal
measurement used by the American units.
standards to measure the cross-
sections of cables.
INTERNAL UNIT
As it is a ratio, the smallest cross-
Individual video/audio or audio only
sections correspond to the largest AWG
device for the identification of the
sizes. The appropriateness of using
individual making the call from the
cables with different types of sheath
entrance panel. Normally, in addition
must be assessed according to the area
to communicating with the entrance
in which the wiring system is installed.
panel, the internal unit also gives the
The most commonly used cable
possibility of performing other actions,
sheath is PVC or LSZH (Low SmokeZero
such as the release of the door lock,
Halogen).
intercom calls, automatic switching on,
etc.

5.5-1
THE TECHNICAL SHEETS

The technical sheets contain detailed information on the individual

devices: external pushbutton panels, audio and video internal units and
system accessories.
The information of the specific device is normally the following:

- description of the device;

- related items;
- technical and dimensional data;
- configuration details;
- specific functions;

Technical sheets can be viewed and

downloaded by accessing
the on-line catalogue
https://catalogue.bticino.com/

With the SEARCH function, by typing the

code, you will be directed directly to the
specific page of the requested item, where
you can consult and download all the specific
documents (technical sheet included).

2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.6-1

WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

NOTE

5.6-2
 2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.6-3
WWW.BTICINO.COM
 CATALOGUE

NOTE

5.6-4
 2-WIRES DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM 5.6-5
WWW.BTICINO.COM
BTicino SpA
Viale Borri, 231
21100 Varese - Italy
www.bticino.com

BTicino SpA reserves at any time the right to modify the contents of this booklet and to communicate,
in any form and modality, the changes brought to the same.
2-WIRES
DOOR ENTRY
SYSTEM

DESIGN AND
INSTALLATION
TECHNICAL GUIDE
AD-EXCM22DFG/GB - Edition 04/2022

PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS FOR ELECTRICAL

AND DIGITAL BUILDING INFRASTRUCTURE